Contents

Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 PDF

1 of 456
1 of 456

Summary of Content for Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 PDF

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation Maintenance Specifications

F2

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per- formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab- lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc- tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

F3

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

NOTICE This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

F4

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care- fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal- er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man- ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

Copyright 2015 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.

CAUTION Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the Owner's Manual.

F5

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts 1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reli- ability to our customers.

2.Why should you use genuine parts? HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engi- neered and built to meet rigid manu- facturing requirements. Damage caused by using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other HYUNDAI warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imita- tion, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchas- ing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the U.S. are packaged with labels writ- ten only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents

1 How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle break-in process / 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders / 1-6

Introduction

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving experience from your vehicle. Your Owners Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recom- mend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual. Illustrations complement the text in this manual to best explain how to use your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under vari- ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro- vided in the Table of Contents. A good place to start is the index; it has an alpha- betical listing of all information in your manual. Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGS, CAU- TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual. These WARNINGS were prepared to enhance your personal safety.You should carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or help- ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates that a condi- tion may result in harm, serious bod- ily injury or death if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION A CAUTION indicates that a condi- tion may result in damage to your vehicle if the caution is ignored.

1 3

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis- sions and spark plug fouling.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline. Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability prob- lems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission con- trol system. Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufacturers warranty if they result from the use of: 1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol. 2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol. 3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per- cent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of E85 may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

WARNING Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when refueling.

Tighten the cap fully clockwise until it clicks one time and stops turning, otherwise the fuel cap open warning light " " will illu- minate. (if equipped)

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci- dent.

CAUTION Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs dri- vability.

CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance prob- lems caused by the use of E85 fuel.

Introduction

41

Other fuels Using fuels such as;

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel, - Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and - Other metallic additives contained

fuels, may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel- eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc. Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may illuminate.

NOTICE Damage to the fuel system or perform- ance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains harmful man- ganese-based fuel additives such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). HYUNDAI does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per- formance and affect your emission con- trol system. The malfunction indicator lamp on the cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol Fuels containing methanol (wood alco- hol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per- formance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.

Fuel Additives HYUNDAI recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit for- mation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com). For customers who do not use TOP Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately may be added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank at every 7,500mile or every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from your author- ized HYUNDAI dealer along with informa- tion on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to: Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance. Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance prob- lems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol.

1 5

Introduction

No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle. Do not race the engine. While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.

Avoid hard stops, except in emergen- cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop- erly.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI- TION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehicles or emitted from them are known to the State of California to cause can- cer and birth defects or reproduc- tive harm. These include: Gasoline and its vapors Engine exhaust Used engine oil Interior passenger compartment

components and materials Component parts which are sub-

ject to heat and wear In addition, battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds and other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Introduction

61

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur- pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hit- ting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehi- cle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi- cle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle

were operating; Whether or not the driver and pas-

senger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ- ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca- tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, spe- cial equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

2 Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Your vehicle at a glance

Your vehicle at a glance

22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button ..........................4-8

2. Side view mirror control switch* ............4-34

3. Central door lock switch* ........................4-9

4. Power window lock button*....................4-19

5. Power window switches* ......................4-16

6. Instrument panel illumination control switch* ..................................................4-37

7. ESC OFF button* ..................................5-21

8. Active ECO button ................................5-32

9. Fuel filler lid release lever ....................4-23

10. Trunk lid release lever (4 Door) ..........4-12

11. Fuse box..............................................7-51

12. Hood release lever ..............................4-21

13. Brake pedal ........................................5-16

14. Accelerator pedal ................................5-6

15. Steering wheel tilt and telescopic lever* ..................................................4-31

* : if equipped

The actual vehicle may differ from the illustration.

ORB014001N

2 3

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Drivers front air bag.........................3-46

2. Horn .................................................4-32

3. Light control/Turn signals .................4-54

4. Instrument cluster.............................4-36

5. Wiper/Washer...................................4-59

6. Ignition switch.....................................5-5

7. Digital clock and audio* .............4-92, 4-97

8. Steering wheel .................................4-30

9. Steering wheel audio control* ..........4-98

10. Climate control system* ........4-67, 4-76

11. Hazard warning flasher switch..4-53, 6-2

12. Shift lever ................................5-7, 5-10

13. Parking brake lever ........................5-17

14. Passengers front air bag ...............3-46

15. Glove box .......................................4-88

16. Power outlet* ..................................4-91

* : if equipped

ORB010002N

Your vehicle at a glance

42

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ORB070100

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-23

2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-27

3. Radiator cap .....................................7-25

4. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-22

5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-22

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-26

7. Air cleaner.........................................7-29

8. Fuse box ...........................................7-51

9. Positive battery terminal ...................7-34

10. Negative battery terminal................7-34

* : if equipped

3

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-14

Child restraint system / 3-26

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-34

Safety features of your vehicle

Safety features of your vehicle

23

Drivers seat (1) Forward and backward (2) Seatback angle (3) Seat cushion height (4) Headrest (5) Armrest*

Front passengers seat (6) Forward and backward (7) Seatback angle (8) Headrest

Rear seat (9) Headrest (10) Seatback folding*

*: if equipped

SEATS

ORB030001N

3 3

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Drivers seat Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property dam- age.

Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback. Storing items against a seatback or in any other way interfering with proper locking of a seatback could result in serious or fatal injury in a sudden stop or collision.

Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap por- tion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips. This is the best position to protect you in case of an accident.

In order to avoid unnecessary and perhaps severe air bag injuries, always sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while maintaining comfortable control of the vehicle. We recom- mend that your chest be at least 10 inches (250 mm) away from the steering wheel.

WARNING - Loose objects Loose objects in the drivers foot area could interfere with the opera- tion of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Do not place anything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon- sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat- back reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the occupants hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result. The driver must advise the passen- ger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehi- cle is in motion.

WARNING - Uprighting seat

When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly and be sure there are no other occupants around the seat. If the seatback is returned without being held and controlled, the back of the seat could spring forward resulting in accidental injury to a person struck by the seatback.

WARNING Do not use a sitting cushion that reduces friction between the seat and passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap por- tion of the seat belt during an acci- dent or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt can't operate normally.

Safety features of your vehicle

43

(Continued) Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If objects are large, heavy, or must be piled, they must be secured. Under no circumstances should cargo be piled higher than the seatbacks. Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop, collision or rollover.

WARNING - Rear seatbacks

The rear seatback must be securely latched. If not, passen- gers and objects could be thrown forward resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or collision.

No passenger should ride in the cargo area or sit or lie on folded seatbacks while the vehicle is moving. All passengers must be properly seated in seats and restrained properly while riding.

When resetting the seatback to the upright position, make sure it is securely latched by pushing it forward and rearwards.

To avoid the possibility of burns, do not remove the carpet in the cargo area. Emission control devices beneath this floor gener- ate high temperatures.

(Continued)

WARNING After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place by attempting to move the seat forward or reverse without using the lock release lever. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle result- ing in an accident.

WARNING Do not adjust the seat while wear-

ing seat belts. Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on the abdomen.

Use extreme caution so that hands or other objects are not caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

Do not put a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you oper- ate the seat, gas may gush out of the lighter and cause fire.

Use extreme caution when pick- ing small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mecha- nism.

3 5

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat Manual adjustment Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rearward: 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up

and hold it. 2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place. Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Seat cushion height (for drivers seat) (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat cushion, push the lever upwards or downwards. To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times. To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

ORB030002 ORB030003 ORB030004

Safety features of your vehicle

63

Armrest (for drivers seat) (if equipped) To use the armrest, swing down the arm- rest to the lowest position.

Headrest The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and comfort. The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps to protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

WARNING For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most peo- ple's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed as severe injury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protec- tion against neck injuries when properly adjusted.

Do not adjust the headrest posi- tion of the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion.

OMG038400ORB030006

3 7

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the head- rest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest: 1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever (1). 2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. 3. Press the headrest release button (3)

while pulling the headrest up (4).

WARNING NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed.

ORB030007 OYFH034205 ORB030032

CAUTION If you recline the seatback towards the front with the headrest and seat cushion raised, the headrest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

83

Reinstall

To reinstall the headrest: 1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release but- ton (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recline lever (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

Active headrest (if equipped)

The active headrest is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact. This helps to prevent the driver's and front passengers head from moving rearward and thus helps prevent neck injuries.

Seatback pocket (if equipped) The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passengers and drivers seatbacks.

HNF2041-1

WARNING A gap between the seat and the headrest release button may appear when seating on the seat or when you push or pull the seat. Be careful not to get your finger, etc. caught in the gap.

WARNING - Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an acci- dent they could come loose from the pocket and injure vehicle occu- pants.

ORB030017

WARNING Always make sure the headrest locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.

ORB030033

3 9

Safety features of your vehicle

Rear seat Headrest The rear seat(s) is equipped with head- rests in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort. The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps to protect the head and neck in the event of a colli- sion.

WARNING For proper operation of the occu- pant detection system: Do not place any items cumula-

tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) in the seatback pocket or on the seat.

Do not hang onto the front pas- senger seat.

ONF039401

WARNING For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most peo- ple's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed as severe injury to an occupant may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protec- tion against severe neck injuries when properly adjusted.

Safety features of your vehicle

103

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest sup- port and lower the headrest (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling upward (2).

Reinstall

To reinstall the headrest, put the head- rest poles (3) into the holes while press- ing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

ORB030007

WARNING Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to proper- ly protect the occupants.

ORB030008

3 11

Safety features of your vehicle

Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks can be folded to facil- itate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing is in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.

4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle.

ORB030021

WARNING The purpose of the fold-down rear seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer objects that could not be accommodated in the cargo area. Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop. Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. Doing this could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sud- den stops.

ORB030022

ORBC032022

Type A

Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

123

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward. Push the seat- back firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.

NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, after returning the seatback to the upright position, press the seatbelt and seatback at the same time. Then pull the belt out. You will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

CAUTION - Rear seat belts When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position. Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the seat belts from being trapped behind or under the seats.

CAUTION - Damaging rear seat belt buckles

When folding the rear seatback, insert the buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion. Doing so can prevent the buckle from being damaged by the rear seatback.

WARNING When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after being folded down: Be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Do not allow the seat belt webbing or buckle to get caught or pinched in the rear seat. Ensure that the seat- back is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. Otherwise, in an accident or sudden stop, the seat could fold down and allow cargo to enter the passenger com- partment, which could result in serious injury or death.

ORBR030031

3 13

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Cargo Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and caus- ing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be proper- ly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loading Make sure the engine is off, the automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or the manual transaxle is in R (Reverse) or 1st, and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wear- ing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided. Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the occu- pant.

(Continued)

(Continued) Care should be taken to avoid con- tamination of the webbing with pol- ishes, oils and chemicals and par- ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Each seat belt assembly must only be used by one occu- pant; it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap.

(Continued) Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twist- ed.

Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or hardware is dam- aged, replace it.

WARNING For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the car is moving.

Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position.

Children age 12 and younger must always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he/she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt can cause serious injuries in a crash. The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.

Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

(Continued)

3 15

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt warning (for drivers seat) The driver's seat belt warning light and chime will activate to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" posi- tion.

*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed

Light-Blink Chime- Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled Unbuckled

Below 3 mph (5 km/h)

6 seconds None

3 mph~ 6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph (10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off (11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph (10 km/h)

Below 3 mph (5 km/h)

6 seconds *1

Stop *2

WARNING No modifications or additions

should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from oper- ating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dan- gerous and you may not be pro- tected by the seat belt properly.

Do not unfasten the seat belt and do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly while driving. This could result in loss of con- trol, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.

Make sure there is nothing in the buckle. The seat belt may not be fastened securely.

1GQA2083

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt por- tion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean for- ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment (Front)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maxi- mum comfort and safety. The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck.The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not next to your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2). Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

B180A01NF-1 ORB030020

Front seat

3 17

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a combina- tion retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle. This type of seat belt combines the fea- tures of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic lock- ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.

WARNING Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro- priate height. Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident.

Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision leading to per- sonal injury or death. Replace your seat belts after being in an accident as soon as possible.

B200A02NF

WARNING You should place the lap belt por- tion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door.

Safety features of your vehicle

183

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt oper- ation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to Using a child restraint system in this section.

NOTICE Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, it is recom- mended that seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation. To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should auto- matically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

3 Point rear center belt To fasten the rear center belt

Insert the tongue plate (A) into the open end of the buckle (B) until an audible click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

B210A01NF-1/H

ORB031035N

ORB031036N

A

B

3 19

Safety features of your vehicle

Pull and insert the tongue plate (C) into the open end of the buckle (D) until an audible click is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted. There will be an audible click when the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manu- ally so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

To unfasten the rear center belt

Press the release button (1) on the buck- le (D) and remove the tongue plate from the buckle (D).

CAUTION When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the CENTER mark must be used.

WARNING When using the rear seat center belt, you must lock all tongue plates and buckles. If any tongue plate or buckle is not locked, it will increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision.

ORB031032N ORB031037N

D

C

D

1

Safety features of your vehicle

203

To disconnect the rear center belt

Insert a key or narrow-ended tool into the groove located on buckle.

NOTICE Always connect the tongue plate to the buckle even when not in use.

Pre-tensioner seat belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions (or side collisions). The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the frontal collision (or side collisions) is severe enough. When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions (or side collisions), the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

NOTICE The pre-tensioner may activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision or rollover.

OED030300

WARNING Do not put anything near the

buckle. Placing objects near the buckle can adversely affect the buckle pre-tensioner and may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.

For your safety, be sure that the belt webbing is not loose or twist- ed and always sit properly on your seat.

ORB031038N

3 21

Safety features of your vehicle

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con- sists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustra- tion: 1. SRS air bag warning light 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly 3. SRS control module 4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly

NOTICE Both the drivers and front passen-

gers pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side col- lisions or rollovers. The pre-tensioners will not be activat- ed if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision.

When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal oper- ating conditions and are not haz- ardous.

Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged peri- ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor- oughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activat- ed.

Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre- tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximate- ly 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.

OMD030051N

WARNING To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt: 1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper position. Please read and follow all of the important information and precautions about your vehi- cles occupant safety features including seat belts and air bags that are provided in this manu- al.

2. Be sure you and your passen- gers always wear seat belts prop- erly.

Safety features of your vehicle

223

Seat belt precautions CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre- tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

WARNING Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti- vation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision.

(Continued)

(Continued) The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.

Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies.

Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner.

Improper handling of the pre-ten- sioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings not to strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tension- er seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadver- tent activation and serious injury.

Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.

If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt must be discarded, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries for all occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Without a seat belt, occupants could be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle. Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce these hazards. Even with advanced air bags, unbelted occupants can be severe- ly injured by a deploying air bag. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occu- pant seating contained in this man- ual.

3 23

Safety features of your vehicle

Infant or small child All 50 states have child restraint laws.You should be aware of the specific require- ments in your state. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more infor- mation about the use of these restraints, refer to Child restraint system in this section.

NOTICE Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the require- ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to Child restraint system in this section.

Larger children Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

WARNING Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times, including infants and chil- dren. Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehi- cle. The violent forces created dur- ing a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior. Always use a child restraint appropriate for your child's height and weight.

Safety features of your vehicle

243

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch- es the childs neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

Pregnant women The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap belt portion should be placed as low and snugly as possible on the hips, not across the abdomen. For specific recommendations, consult a physician.

Injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should con- sult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve max- imum effectiveness of the restraint sys- tem, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the car is mov- ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING - Shoulder belts on small children

Never allow a shoulder belt to be in contact with a childs neck or face while the vehicle is in motion.

If seat belts are not properly worn and adjusted on children, there is a risk of death or serious injury.

WARNING - Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the safety belt over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located or above the abdomen where the belt could seriously injure or even cause the death of the unborn child during an impact.

3 25

Safety features of your vehicle

Care of seat belts Seat belt systems should never be disas- sembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected peri- odically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concern- ing seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a col- lision or sudden stop. The protec- tion of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seat. Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work proper- ly. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater the chance that an occupant's hips will slide under the lap belt causing serious internal injuries or the occupant's neck could strike the shoulder belt. Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seat- backs upright.

WARNING When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be care- ful not to damage the seat belt web- bing or buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with damaged webbing or buckle will not be as strong and could possibly fail during a colli- sion or sudden stop, resulting in serious injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statis- tics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the require- ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system (if equipped). Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the man- ufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger-side air bag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle.

A seat belt or child restraint sys- tem can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day, even if the outside tempera- ture does not feel hot. Be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there.

When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the lug- gage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident.

Children may be seriously injured or killed by an inflating air bag. All children, even those too large for child restraints, must ride in the rear seat.

WARNING To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries: Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat. A child riding in the front passen- ger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in serious or fatal injuries.

Always follow the child restraint system manufacturers instruc- tions for installation and use of the child restraint.

Always make sure the child seat is secured properly in the car and your child is securely restrained in the child seat.

Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the cars interior.

Never put a seat belt over your- self and a child. During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child causing serious internal injuries.

(Continued)

3 27

Safety features of your vehicle

Using a child restraint system For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required.This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the man- ufacturer's instructions.

(Continued) Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle not even for a short time. The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in serious injuries to children inside. Even very young children may inadver- tently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the win- dows, or lock themselves or oth- ers inside the vehicle.

Never allow two children, or any two persons, to use the same seat belt.

Children often squirm and repo- sition themselves improperly. Never let a child ride with the shoulder belt under their arm or behind their back. Always proper- ly position and secure children in the rear seat.

Never allow a child to stand-up or kneel on the seat or floor of a moving vehicle. During a colli- sion or sudden stop, the child can be violently thrown against the vehicles interior, resulting in serious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued) Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback, it may not pro- vide adequate security in an acci- dent.

Seat belts can become very hot, especially when the car is parked in direct sunlight. Always check seat belt buckles before fasten- ing them over a child.

After an accident, have an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer check the child restraint system, seat belt, tether anchor and lower anchor.

If there is not enough space to place the child restraint system because of the driver's seat, install the child restraint system in the rear right seat.

CRS09

ORB030026

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Safety features of your vehicle

283

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency condi- tions (emergency locking mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the automatic locking mode to secure a child restraint.

Placing a passenger seat belt into the automatic locking mode The automatic locking mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following proce- dure.

WARNING - Child seat installation

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the vehicle and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint. Before installing the child restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.

If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding child restraint systems and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could increase the chance and/or severity of injury in an accident.

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual), the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

WARNING Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat, because of the danger that an inflating passenger-side air bag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child.

E2MS103005

3 29

Safety features of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the fol- lowing: 1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, follow- ing the restraint manufacturers instructions. Be sure the seat belt web- bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct click sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extend- ed, it will shift the retractor to the Automatic locking (child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible clicking or ratcheting sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode. If no dis- tinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

OMD030054AOMD030053A OMD030055A

Safety features of your vehicle

303

5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the Automatic locking mode by attempt- ing to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the Automatic locking mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the Automatic locking mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

Securing a child restraint seat with Tether Anchor system Child restraint hook holders are located on the package tray or on the floor behind the rear seats.

OMD030056A

WARNING - Automatic locking mode

The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the emergency lock mode whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully. Therefore, the pre- ceding seven steps must be fol- lowed each time a child restraint is installed. If the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking mode, the child restraint can move when your vehi- cle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car, including set- ting the retractor to the Automatic Locking mode.

ORB032024R

ORB031033L

4 Door

5 Door

3 31

Safety features of your vehicle

1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable head- rests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback. For more information about the use of the headrests, refer to "Adjusting the height up and down - Rear seat" in this section.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

ORB030025

WARNING - Child restraint check

Check that the child restraint sys- tem is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Tether strap Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether anchor or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break, causing serious injury or death.

WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint is not properly anchored to the car and the child is not prop- erly restrained in the child restraint. Always follow the child seat manu- facturers instructions for installa- tion and use.

WARNING - Child restraint anchorage

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum- stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

Safety features of your vehicle

323

Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to indi- cate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints.

B230D01NF ORB030023

Lower Anchor

Lower Anchor Position Indicator

WARNING When using the vehicle's

"LATCH" system to install a child restraint system in the rear seat, all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt web- bing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

Do not place anything around the lower anchors. Also make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the lower anchors.

3 33

Safety features of your vehicle

LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position. The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions. Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH- compatible attachments. Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors. Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat for- ward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.

NOTICE The recommended weight for the LATCH system is under 65 lbs (30 kg). How to calculate the child restraint weight : Child restraint weight =

65 lbs (30 kg) - Child weight

WARNING If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a colli- sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH lower anchors

LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions. Never attempt to attach a LATCH equipped seat in the center seating position. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a collision.

CAUTION Do not allow the rear seat belt web- bing to get scratched or pinched by the child-seat latch and LATCH anchor during the installation.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

(1) Drivers front air bag (2) Passengers front air bag (3) Side impact air bag (4) Curtain air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the seat belts provided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

ORB035051L

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

3 35

Safety features of your vehicle

How does the air bag system operate Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START position.

Air bags inflate instantly in the event of serious frontal or side collision in order to help protect the occupants from seri- ous physical injury.

There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags are designed to inflate by the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors deter- mine whether the sensors send out an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the densi- ty and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. Though, factors are not limit- ed to those mentioned above.

The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will sim- ply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

In addition to inflating in certain side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side impact air bags and curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover. When a rollover is detected, side impact air bags and curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help pro- vide protection from ejection, especial- ly when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of the extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to get the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life- threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of air bag design. However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which normally can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned exces- sively close to the air bag.

WARNING To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air bags in a collision, the driver should sit as far back from the steering wheel air bag as possi- ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm) away). The front passengers should always move their seats as far back as possible and sit back in their seat.

Air bags inflate instantly in the event of collision, and passen- gers may be injured by the air bag expansion force if they are not in proper position.

Air bag inflation may cause injuries which normally include facial or bodily abrasions, injuries from broken glasses or burns by the air bag inflation gasses.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the igni- tion of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis- comfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce dis- comfort and prevent prolonged expo- sure to the smoke and powder. Though the smoke and powder are non- toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint on the front passengers seat. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passengers seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac- ing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury. In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passengers seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

WARNING When the air bags deploy, the air bag related parts in the steering wheel and/or instrument panel and/or in both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. To prevent injury, do not touch the air bag storage areas internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated.

WARNING Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it!

Never put a child restraint in the front passengers seat. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, be sure to install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and securely lock the child restraint system in position. Inflation of side and/or curtain air bags could cause serious injury or death to an infant or child.

1JBH3051

3 37

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag warning light The purpose of air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off. Have the system checked if: The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON. The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds. The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion. The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

SRS components and functions The SRS consists of the following com- ponents: 1. Driver's front air bag module 2. Passenger's front air bag module 3. Side impact air bag modules 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor 8. Front impact sensors 9. Side impact sensors 10. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-

cator (Front passengers seat only) 11. Occupant detection system (Front

passengers seat only)

12. Drivers and front passengers seat belt buckle sensors

13. Anchor pre-tensioner 14. Side pressure sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

W7-147 OMD030050N

Safety features of your vehicle

383

The SRS air bag warning light " " on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, after which the SRS air bag warning light " " should go out.

The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

W7-147

WARNING If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible. The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON. The light stays on after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds. The light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion. The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

B240B01L

Drivers front air bag (1)

3 39

Safety features of your vehicle

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other con- trols.

B240B02L B240B03L

Drivers front air bag (2) Drivers front air bag (3)

WARNING Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, CD or discs holder, sticker, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with a pas- senger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the pas- senger's air bag inflates.

When installing a container of liq- uid air freshener inside the vehi- cle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. It may become a dangerous pro- jectile and cause injury if the pas- senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L

Passengers front air bag

Safety features of your vehicle

403

Occupant detection system Your vehicle is equipped with an occu- pant detection system in the front pas- senger's seat. The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's front air bag is not affected or controlled by the occupant detection system.

WARNING If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generated during air bag deployment may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggra- vate asthma for some persons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed.

The SRS can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the SRS air bag warn- ing light " " does not illumi- nate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 sec- onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued) Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warn- ing light to illuminate.

ORB031034N

WARNING Do not put anything in front of the passenger air bag off indicator.

3 41

Safety features of your vehicle

Main components of occupant detection system A detection device located within the

front passenger seat. Electronic system to determine whether

the front passenger air bag system should be activated or deactivated.

A warning light located on the instru- ment panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicat- ing the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.

The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.

The ODS is designed to detect the pres- ence of a properly-seated front passen- ger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The purpose is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For example, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant detection sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and wearing the seat belt properly, should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on the edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfort- ably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.

The ODS may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the detection system. These include: (1) Failing to sit in an upright position. (2) Leaning against the door or center

console. (3) Sitting towards the sides or the

front of the seat. (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or

resting them on other locations. (5) Improperly wearing the safety belt. (6) Reclining the seat back. (7) Unauthorized replacement of seat

cover. (8) Covering seat with blanket

Safety features of your vehicle

423

WARNING Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passen- ger's seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the Occupant Detection System (ODS). Your ODS is designed to resist electronic waves, but do not place an electronic device such as laptop computer on or near the seat cush- ion since it may defeat the proper functioning of the ODS.

(Continued)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

Condition detected by the occupant detection system

1. Adult *1

2. Infant *2 or child restraint

system with 12 months old *3 *4

3. Unoccupied

4. Malfunction in the system

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator

light SRS warning light

Front passenger air bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices

*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec- ognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. *4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12

months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.

3 43

Safety features of your vehicle

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or center console.

- Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

- Never place feet on the dash- board.

OVQ036013N

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load, an active electronic device or blanket in the front passenger seat or seat- back pocket.

- Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place feet on the front pas- senger seatback.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

443

When an adult is seated in the front pas- senger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is on, turn the igni- tion switch to the LOCK or OFF position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com- fortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indi- cator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

NOTICE The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator illuminates for about 4 sec- onds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNING Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the PAS- SENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator remains illuminat- ed after the adult passenger reposi- tions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not deploy. Front seat passengers must stay properly seated to avoid serious injury from a deploying air bag.

Proper position

WARNING Do not put a heavy load in the front passenger seatback pocket or on the front passenger seat. Do not hang onto the front passenger seat. Do not hang any items, such as a seatback table, on the front passenger seat- back. Do not place feet on the front passenger seatback. Do not place any items under the front passenger seat. Any of these could interfere with proper sensor operation.

WARNING Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupant detection system, never install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. A deploying air bag can forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death. Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the avail- able lap/shoulder belts. No mat- ter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

(Continued)

3 45

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued) Do not place an electronic device

such as a laptop computer on the front passenger seat. Its electron- ic field may cause the ODS to switch to the "on" condition and thus allow the passenger air bag to deploy needlessly in a colli- sion, increasing your repair costs.

The adult or child in the front pas- sengers seat who is not seated correctly (for example: seat exces- sively reclined, leaning on the door or center console, or hips shifted forward in the seat) can cause a condition where the occu- pant detection system senses less field than if the occupant were seated properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). This condition can result in an adult potentially being misclassi- fied as a child and illumination of the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator.

(Continued) Accident statistics show that chil-

dren are safer if they are restrained in the rear, as opposed to the front seat. It is recommend- ed that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child rid- ing in a booster seat.

Air bags can only be used once have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag imme- diately after deployment.

The occupant detection system may not work properly if water, coffee or any other liquid includ- ing rain gets on the seat. Keep the front seat dry at all times.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the PASSENGER AIR BAG

"OFF" indicator is illuminated when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), have that person sit in the rear seat.

Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place any- thing on or attach anything such as a blanket or seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.

Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools when occupying the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.

Do not use accessory seat cov- ers on the front seats.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

463

Driver's and passenger's front air bag Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" or AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passen- ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's seat posi- tion, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.

WARNING If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instru- ment panel will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system. If there is a mal- function of the occupant detection system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illu- minate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the occu- pant detection system and the SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

ORB030010

Drivers front air bag

ORB030011

Passengers front air bag

3 47

Safety features of your vehicle

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened. These sensors pro- vide the ability to control the SRS deploy- ment based on whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two lev- els. A first stage level is provided for mod- erate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity and seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see "Occupant detection system" in this section.

WARNING If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instru- ment panel will illuminate because the SRS air bag warning light is connected with the occupant detection system. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, remains illumi- nated after approximately 6 sec- onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the advanced SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

WARNING Do not place any objects under- neath the front seats as they could interfere with the occupant detec- tion system.

Safety features of your vehicle

483

NOTICE Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sun visor.

Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro- vide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

(Continued) Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags. Improperly positioned driver and passengers can be severely injured by inflat- ing air bags.

Never lean against the door or center console always sit in an upright position.

Do not allow a passenger to ride in the front seat when the PAS- SENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indica- tor is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a moderate or severe frontal crash.

(Continued)

WARNING Always use seat belts and child restraints every trip, every time, everyone! Air bags inflate with con- siderable force and in the blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occu- pants in proper position to obtain maximum benefit from the air bag. Even with advanced air bags, improperly and unbelted occupants can be severely injured when the air bag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant safety con- tained in this manual. To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries and receive the maxi- mum safety benefit from your restraint system: Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat. ABC Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

Front and side air bags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats.

(Continued)

WARNING If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, please contact the Hyundai Customer Assistance Center at 1- 800-633-5151.

3 49

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued) No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

Never place covers, blankets or seat warmers on the passenger seat as these may interfere with the occupant detection system.

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to acci- dental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inopera- tive.

If the SRS air bag warning light remains illuminated while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

(Continued)

(Continued) Air bags can only be used once

have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag imme- diately after deployment.

The SRS is designed to deploy the front air bags only when an impact is sufficiently severe. Additionally, the air bags will only deploy once. Seat belts must be worn at all times.

Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear- impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detection system, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat.The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an air bag deployment in case of an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued) Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow chil- dren to ride in the front passen- ger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occu- pants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unneces- sarily close to the air bag while the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

503

Side impact air bag Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passen- ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash sever- ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side impact air bags and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected. The side impact air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

(Continued) Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. All occupants should sit upright with the seat- back in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfort- ably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed.

The SRS air bag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occu- pant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

ORBC030021

ORB035053L

Front

WARNING Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

3 51

Safety features of your vehicle

Curtain air bag Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in cer- tain side impact collisions.

WARNING The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The air bags deploy only in certain side impact condi- tions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.

For best protection from the side impact air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passen- ger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

Do not use any accessory seat covers.

(Continued)

(Continued) Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bag.

Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself.

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dan- gerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates.

To prevent unexpected deploy- ment of the side impact air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid impact to the side impact sensor when the ignition switch is on.

If the seat or seat cover is dam- aged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer because your vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and an occupant detection system.

ORB035052L

Safety features of your vehicle

523

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash sever- ity, angle, speed and impact. The side impact air bags and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situa- tions.

WARNING In order for side and curtain air

bags to provide the best protec- tion, front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat.

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to put the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked posi- tion.

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passen- gers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain air bags.

(Continued)

(Continued) Never try to open or repair any

components of the side curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Failure to follow the above instruc- tions can result in injury or death to the vehicle occupants in an acci- dent.

3 53

Safety features of your vehicle

Why didnt my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non-infla- tion conditions of the air bag) There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expect- ed to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

Air bag collision sensors (1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor (2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (4) Side pressure sensor

ORB035013/ORB030014/ORB030015/OMD030039/ORB031018N

Safety features of your vehicle

543

Air bag inflation conditions Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensi- ty, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

WARNING Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed. This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should, causing severe injury or death. Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued) Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, body or B pillars or front door where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Your vehicle has been designed to absorb impact and deploy the air bag(s) in certain collisions. Installing bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-gen- uine parts may adversely affect your vehicles collision and air bag deployment performance.

1JBA3513

3 55

Safety features of your vehicle

Side impact and curtain air bags (if equipped)

Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a side impact of sufficient severity is detected.

Although the drivers and front passen- gers air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side impact air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollover situa- tions, but they may inflate in other colli- sions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unpaved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unpaved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

1JBA3514

ORB035054L

1JBA3515

Safety features of your vehicle

563

Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any addi- tional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag deployment would not provide addi- tional occupant protection. However, side impact and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional bene- fit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

OBH038060OBH038058 1JBA3516

3 57

Safety features of your vehicle

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to ride under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be signifi- cantly reduced by such under-ride collisions.

Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment would not provide addi- tional protection to the occupants. Side impact air bags and curtain air bags may inflate in rollover accidents.

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the deceleration forces are significant- ly reduced.

1JBA35181JBA3517 1JBA3522

Safety features of your vehicle

583

SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light " " does not illuminate, when you turn the ignition on, or continu- ously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury.

Not only the modification of the parts where the SRS sensors are but also the modification of other parts of the vehicle may affect the SRS performance and lead to possible injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad cov- ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to acci- dental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inopera- tive.

If components of the air bag sys- tem must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and pro- cedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you shouldn't try to start the engine; have the car towed to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3 59

Safety features of your vehicle

Additional safety precautions Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded- down back seat. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor.

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wear- ing a seat belt during a crash or emer- gency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle.

Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant. If more than one person uses the same seat belt, they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between them- selves and the air bags. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates.

Keep occupants away from the air bag covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. If occupants are too close to the air bag covers, they could be injured if the air bags inflate.

Do not attach or place objects on or near the air bag covers. Any object attached to or placed on the front or side air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air bags.

Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the sup- plemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring har- nesses.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seri- ously injured or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior struc- ture or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury or death.

Always sit upright with the seat- back in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs comfort- ably extended and your feet on the floor.

Be careful not to cause impact to the doors when the ignition is ON. The air bags may inflate.

Safety features of your vehicle

603

Air bag warning label Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and passengers of poten- tial risks of the air bag system.

ORB030029

*

OMD030040N

4Features of your vehicle

Keys / 4-3

Remote keyless entry / 4-4

Door locks / 4-7

Trunk / 4-12

Tailgate / 4-14

Windows / 4-16

Hood / 4-21

Fuel filler lid / 4-23

Sunroof / 4-26

Steering wheel / 4-30

Mirrors / 4-32

Instrument cluster / 4-36

Hazard warning flasher / 4-53

Lighting / 4-53

Wipers and washers / 4-59

Interior light / 4-63

Defroster / 4-66

Manual climate control system / 4-67

Automatic climate control system / 4-76

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 3-83

Storage compartments / 4-87

Interior features / 4-90

Exterior features / 4-95

Audio system / 4-97

Features of your vehicle4

4 3

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number The key code number is stamped or printed on the key code tag attached to the key set. Should you lose

your keys, this number will enable an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehi- cle.

Key operations Used to start the engine, lock and unlock the doors.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition key Leaving children unattended in a vehicle with the ignition key is dan- gerous even if the key is not in the ignition switch. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch. The ignition key would enable children to oper- ate power windows or other con- trols, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the Engine is running.

WARNING Use only HYUNDAI original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

Features of your vehicle

44

Remote keyless entry system operations Lock (1) All doors are locked if the lock button is pressed. If all doors and trunk are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all doors are locked.

Also, if the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warn- ing lights will blink and the horn will sound once to confirm that the door is locked. However, if any door or trunk lid remains open, the hazard warning lights (and/or the horn) will not operate. But if all doors and trunk lid are closed after the lock but- ton is pressed, the hazard warning lights will blink once.

Unlock (2) Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once. The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the driver's door is unlocked. All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed twice within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink twice again to indicate that all doors are unlocked. If no doors are opened within 30 seconds after unlocking them, the doors will automatically lock again.

NOTICE - Unlock mode conversion (if equipped)

You can change the system to unlock all doors by one pressing the unlock button on the transmitter. If you want this fea- ture (central door unlock mode), per- form the following:

two stage unlock mode central door unlock mode

The unlock mode is changed alternately by pressing the lock button and unlock button on the transmitter at the same time for 5 seconds or more. The hazard warn- ing lights will blink four times to indicate that the mode conversion is completed.

Panic (3) The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec- ond. To stop the horn and lights, press any button except the trunk button on the transmitter.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB044381

OJB040008N

4 5

Features of your vehicle

Transmitter precautions NOTICE The transmitter will not work if any of following occur: The ignition key is in ignition switch. You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]). The battery in the transmitter is

weak. Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal. The weather is extremely cold. The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued) If the transmitter is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the sig- nal from the transmitter could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is espe- cially important when the phone is active such as making call, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid and fire. If the inside of the transmitter gets damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit may mal- function, excluding the car from the warranty.

WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufactur- ers vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

64

Battery replacement The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat- tery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure. 1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently

pry open the transmitter center cover. 2. Replace the battery with a new battery

(CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is positioned correctly.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit- ter reprogramming.

CAUTION The transmitter is designed to

give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

To avoid damaging the transmit- ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

WARNING An inappropriately dis- posed battery can be harm- ful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

1KMA2003

4 7

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from out- side the vehicle Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock.

If you lock the door with a key, all vehi- cle doors will lock automatically. (if equipped)

From the drivers door, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle once to unlock the drivers door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors. (if equipped)

Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that the doors are closed securely.

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, door locks

and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

If the door is locked/unlocked multi- ple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

NOTICE - Unlock mode conversion (if equipped)

You can change the system to unlock all doors by turning the key to the right once. If you want this feature (central door unlock mode), perform the following:

two stage unlock mode central door unlock mode

The unlock mode is changed alternately by pressing the lock button and unlock button on the transmitter (if equipped) at the same time for 5 seconds or more. The hazard warning lights will blink four times to indicate that the mode conversion is completed.

DOOR LOCKS

OYF049006

Lock Unlock

WARNING If you don't close the door

securely, the door may open again.

Be careful that someone's body and hands are not trapped when closing the door.

Features of your vehicle

84

To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2) to the Lock posi- tion and close the door (3).

If you lock the door with the central door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

NOTICE Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle With the door lock button To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the Unlock position. The red mark (2) on the button will be visi- ble.

To lock a door, push the door lock but- ton (1) to the Lock position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the button will not be visible.

To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

If the inner door handle on either front door is pulled when the door lock but- ton is in the locked position, the door (or all doors) will unlock and the door will open. (if equipped)

Front door cannot be locked if the igni- tion key is in the ignition switch and the door is open. (if equipped)

ORB040003

Lock

Unlock

WARNING - Door lock malfunction

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehi- cle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit: Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from out- side.

ORB040002L

4 9

Features of your vehicle

With central door lock switch (if equipped) Operate by depressing the central door lock switch. When pushing down on the front por-

tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

When pushing down on the rear por- tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

If the key is in the ignition switch and front door is open, the doors will not lock even though the front portion (1) of central door lock switch is pressed.

WARNING - Doors The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi- cle is in motion to prevent acci- dental opening of the door. Locked doors will also discour- age potential intruders when the vehicle stops or slows.

Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcy- cles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door. Opening a door when something is approaching can cause damage or injury.

ORBC040004

ORB041410N

Passenger's door

Drivers door

WARNING - Unlocked vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can invite theft or possible harm to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle while you are gone. Always remove the ignition key, engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

Features of your vehicle

104

Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped) All doors will be automatically unlocked when the impact is delivered to impact sensors while the ignition switch is ON. However, the doors may not be unlocked if mechanical problems occur with the door lock system or battery.

Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped) All doors will be automatically locked after the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h). And all doors will be automat- ically unlocked when you turn the engine off or when you remove the ignition key. (if equipped)

Auto door lock/unlock feature (Automatic transaxle) (if equipped) All doors will automatically lock when

the shift lever is moved out of P (Park). All doors will automatically unlock

when the shift lever is moved into P (Park).

WARNING - Unattended children

An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended chil- dren or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Furthermore, children might operate features of the vehi- cle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possi- bly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle.

4 11

Features of your vehicle

Child-protector rear door lock The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally open- ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehi- cle. 1. Open the rear door. 2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the Lock position. When the child safety lock is in the Lock ( ) position, rear door will not open even though the inner door handle is pulled inside the vehi- cle.

3. Close the rear door. To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle (2). Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

ORB040005

WARNING - Rear door locks

If children accidentally open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle, resulting in severe injury or death. To prevent children from opening the rear doors from the inside, the rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

124

Opening the trunk With the key To open the trunk, insert the key and turn it clockwise.

With the trunk lid release lever To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, pull up the trunk lid release lever. Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk is locked automatically.

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, trunk locks and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

TRUNK (4 DOOR)

ORB040006

CAUTION Make certain that you close the trunk before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the trunk lift cylinders and attached hardware if the trunk is not closed prior to driving.

WARNING The trunk swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when open- ing the trunk.

ORB043007N

4 13

Features of your vehicle

Closing the trunk To close the trunk, lower the trunk lid, then press down on it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again.

Emergency trunk safety release Your vehicle is equipped with an emer- gency trunk release lever located inside the trunk. The lever glows in the dark when the trunk lid is closed. If someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, pulling this handle will open the trunk.

ORB040302

WARNING For emergencies, be fully aware

of the location of the emergency trunk safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the trunk if you are accidentally locked in the trunk.

No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk of the vehicle at any time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable to get out, severe injury or death could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat build-up, or because of exposure to cold weather condi- tions. The trunk is also a highly dangerous location in the event of a crash because it is not a pro- tected occupant space but is a part of the vehicles crush zone.

Your vehicle should be kept locked and keys be kept out of the reach of children. Parents should teach their children about the dangers of playing in trunks.

Use the release lever for emer- gencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially while the vehi- cle is in motion.

WARNING The trunk lid should be always kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the vehicle and serious ill- ness or death may result.

Features of your vehicle

144

WARNING Make sure your hands, feet and other parts of your body are safely out of the way before closing the tailgate.

CAUTION Make sure nothing is near the tail- gate latch and striker while closing the tailgate. It may damage the tail- gate's latch.

Opening the tailgate The tailgate is locked or unlocked by

turning the key to the "Lock" or "Unlock" position.

The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key, transmitter or central door lock switch.

If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle and pulling it up.

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work proper- ly due to freezing conditions.

Closing the tailgate To close the tailgate, lower and push down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched.

TAILGATE (5 DOOR)

WARNING The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when open- ing the tailgate.

CAUTION Make certain that you close the tail- gate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attaching hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

ORB041404

4 15

Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Exhaust fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all win- dows open so that additional out- side air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargo area

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.

Features of your vehicle

164

(1) Drivers door power window switch (2) Front passengers door power win-

dow switch (3) Rear door (left) power window switch (4) Rear door (right) power window

switch (5) Window opening and closing (6) Automatic power window up/down*

(Drivers window) (7) Power window lock switch * : if equipped

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WINDOWS

ORB043008L

4 17

Features of your vehicle

Power windows The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate. Each door has a power window switch that controls that door's window. The driver has a power window lock switch which can block the operation of pas- senger windows. The drivers door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.

The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the igni- tion key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front doors open, the power windows cannot be operated within the 30 second period (if equipped : remote keyless entry sys- tem).

NOTICE While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffet- ing or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximate- ly one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening. Window opening and closing

To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corre- sponding switch to the first detent posi- tion (5).

ORB043092

Features of your vehicle

184

Auto down window (if equipped) (Drivers window) Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent posi- tion (6) completely lowers the drivers window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, momentarily pull the switch in the direction opposite of the window movement.

Auto up/down window (if equipped) (Driver's window) Depressing or pulling up the power win- dow switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or depress and release the switch to the opposite direction of the movement.

If the power window is not operated cor- rectly, the automatic power window sys- tem must be reset as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. 2. Close the window and continue pulling

up on the drivers power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

ORB043093L ORB043303L

4 19

Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approxi- mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.

NOTICE The automatic reverse feature for the drivers window is only active when the auto up feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway posi- tion on the power window switch.

Power window lock button The driver can disable the power window switches on the front and rear passen- gers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch to lock position (pressed). When the power window lock switch is pressed, the driver's master control can- not operate the front and rear passen- gers' power windows.

ORB043009L

WARNING Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper win- dow channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resist- ance and will not stop and reverse direction.

OUN026013

Features of your vehicle

204

. WARNING - Windows

NEVER leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised chil- dren, when the Engine is running.

NEVER leave any child unattend- ed in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entan- gle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others.

Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a win- dow.

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the dri- vers door power window lock switch in the LOCK position (depressed). Serious injury can result from unintentional window operation by the child.

Do not extend any head or arms outside through the window open- ing while driving.

CAUTION To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposing directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

4 21

Features of your vehicle

Opening the hood 1.Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push the secondary latch (1) to the left and lift the hood (2).

3.Pull out the support rod from the engine room (3).

4.Hold the hood open with the support rod (4).

HOOD

ORB040010 ORB040011 ORBC044012

WARNING - Hot parts Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the engine is hot.

WARNING Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P(Park) posi- tion for automatic transaxle and to the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking brake.

Features of your vehicle

224

Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing: All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed. Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30 cm) above the closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it locks into place.

WARNING Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed from the hood opening. Closing the hood with an obstruction present in the hood opening may result in property damage or severe personal injury.

Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be damaged.

4 23

Features of your vehicle

Opening the fuel filler lid The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling the fuel filler lid opener switch.

NOTICE If the fuel filler lid will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi- ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine. 2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel

filler lid opener switch. 3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open. 4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap (2) counterclockwise. 5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid 1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it clicks one time. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly making sure that it is securely closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

ORB040013 ORB044014A

WARNING - Refueling If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin and thus subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before com- pletely removing the cap.

Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when refueling.

Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning light will illuminate. (if equipped)

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci- dent.

Features of your vehicle

244

(Continued) Use only approved portable plas- tic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cel- lular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.

DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fab- ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static elec- tricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must re- enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis- charge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gaso- line source.

When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refueling dan- gers

Automotive fuels are flammable materials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines care- fully. Failure to follow these guide- lines may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death by fire or explosion. Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station facility. Before refueling, note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-Off, if available, at the gas station facility.

Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis- charge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe dis- tance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

4 25

Features of your vehicle

(Continued) If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi- cle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire depart- ment or 911. Follow any safety instructions they provide.

CAUTION Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel require- ments" suggested in section 1.

If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is installed securely to pre- vent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

Features of your vehicle

264

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control switch located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

NOTICE In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez- ing conditions.

After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

NOTICE The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position.

CAUTION Do not continue to move the sun- roof control lever after the sunroof is in the fully open, closed, or tilt position. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

WARNING Never adjust the sunroof or sun- shade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an acci- dent that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB040015

4 27

Features of your vehicle

Sliding the sunroof To open or close the sunroof (manual slide feature), pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or forward to the first detent position. To open the sunroof (autoslide feature), press the sunroof control switch towards the rear of the vehicle for more than 0.5 second. The sunroof will slide to the recommend- ed open position (about 2 in. before the maximum slide open position). To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control switch momentarily.

To open the sunroof to the maximum slide open position, press the the switch towards the rear of the vehicle once again and hold it until the sunroof slides all the way open.

NOTICE To reduce wind noise while driving, we recommend you to drive at the recom- mended postion (about 2 in. before the maximum slide open positon).

To close the sunroof (autoslide feature), move the sunroof control switch towards the front of the vehicle for more than 0.5 second. The sunroof will close all the way. To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control switch momen- tarily.

Automatic reversal If an object or part of the body is detect- ed while the sunroof is closing automati- cally, it will reverse direction, and then stop. The auto reverse function does not work if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

OBK049018ORB040016

Features of your vehicle

284

Tilting the sunroof To open the sunroof Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

To close the sunroof Pull the sunroof lever downward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

CAUTION Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail. If you try to open the sunroof when

the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

While using sunroof for a long time, dust between sunroof and roof panel can make a noise. Open the sunroof and regularly remove the dust using clean cloth.

WARNING - Sunroof Be careful that someones head,

hands and body are not trapped by a closing sunroof.

Do not extend face, neck, arms or body outside through the sunroof opening while driving.

Make sure hand and face are safely out of the way before clos- ing a sunroof.

ORB040017

4 29

Features of your vehicle

Sunshade The sunshade will be opened with the glass panel automatically when the glass panel is opened. You will have to close it manually if you want it closed.

Resetting the sunroof Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol- lowings) - Battery is discharged or disconnected

or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected.

- The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally operate.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion and close the sunroof completely.

2. Release the control lever. 3. Push and hold the control lever for-

ward (for more than 10 seconds) until the sunroof tilts and slightly moves. Then, release the lever.

4. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the control lever forward (for more than 5 seconds) until the sunroof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN SLIDE OPEN SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the control lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys- tem is reset.

For more detailed information, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.

OBK049019

CAUTION If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, the sunroof may operate improperly.

Features of your vehicle

304

Electric power steering (EPS) The power steering uses a motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering sys- tem becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort. The motor driven power steering is con- trolled by a power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to command the motor. The steering assist increases as the vehicles speed increases and as the vehicles speed decreases for optimum steering assist decreases. Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steer- ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE The following symptoms may occur dur- ing normal vehicle operation: The EPS warning light does not illu-

minate. The steering gets heavy immediately

after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condi- tion.

A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or LOCK (OFF) position.

A motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warn- ing light will illuminate on the instru- ment cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to operate due to increasing steering effort. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

(Continued)

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normal- ly, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become diffi- cult to control or operate abnor- mally. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnor- mal noise could occur. If tempera- ture rises, the noise will disap- pear. This is a normal condition.

When the vehicle is stationary, if you turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right continu- ously, the steering wheel becomes heavier from the end. This is normal and not system malfunction. As time passes, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

4 31

Features of your vehicle

(Continued) When you operate the steering wheel

in low temperature, abnormal noise could occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

When the charging system warning light comes on or the voltage is low (When the alternator (or battery) does not operate normally or it malfunc- tions), the steering wheel may get heavy and become difficult to operate due to increased steering effort.

Tilt and telescopic steering (if equipped) Tilt and telescopic steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instru- ment panel warning lights and gauges.

To change the steering wheel angle and height, pull down the lock release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

ORB044018N

WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel

while driving.You may lose steer- ing control and cause severe per- sonal injury, death or accidents.

After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position.

Features of your vehicle

324

Horn To sound the horn, press the horn sym- bol on your steering wheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

NOTICE To sound the horn, press the area indi- cated by the horn symbol on your steer- ing wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position. Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

WARNING - Rear visibility Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision through the rear window.

ORB040020

Day

Night

WARNING Do not modify the inside mirror and do not install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an accident or deployment of the air bag.

ORBC040019

CAUTION Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp- pointed object.

MIRRORS

4 33

Features of your vehicle

Side View Mirrors Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving. Your vehicle is equipped with both left- hand and right-hand side view mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing in a narrow street.

Blind spot mirror (if equipped) The blind spot mirror (BSM) is supple- mental mirror to help reduce a driver's blind spot that will show the rear side ter- ritory of your vehicle. The blind spot mir- ror is equipped with the left-hand side view mirror.

CAUTION Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with warm water.

CAUTION If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radi- ator antifreeze) to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

WARNING Do not adjust or fold the side view mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.

WARNING - Rearview mir- rors

The right side view mirror is con- vex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to deter- mine the actual distance of fol- lowing vehicles when changing lanes.

ORB044380N

OFS053068

Remote control Electric type

The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right side view mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, the ignition switch should be in the ACC or ON posi- tion, or engine is running. Push the switch (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjust- ment control to position the selected mir- ror up, down, left or right. After the adjustment, put the switch into the neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust- ing angles, but the motor contin- ues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

Do not attempt to adjust the side view mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the mirror.

ORBC040023

Features of your vehicle

344

WARNING Always check the road condition

while driving for unexpected situ- ations even though the vehicle is equipped with a blind spot mirror.

The blind spot mirror is a device made for convenience. Do not solely rely on the mirror but always pay attention to your sur- roundings.

4 35

Features of your vehicle

Folding the side view mirror (if equipped) To fold side view mirror, grasp the hous- ing of mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

ORB040024

Features of your vehicle

364

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Fuel gauge

7. Odometer/Trip computer

ORB045025N/ORB045026N

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details refer to the "Gauges" section in the next pages.

Type A

Type B

4 37

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel illumination When the vehicles parking lights or headlights are on, turn the dial to the upper or lower part of the switch to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

Gauges Speedometer The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle. The speedometer is calibrated in miles per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi- mate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm). Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

ORB040332

ORB040031N

ORB040030N

Type A

Type B ORB040305

ORB040306

Type A

Type B

Features of your vehicle

384

When the door is open, or if the engine is not started within 1 minute, the tachometer pointer may move slightly in ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON. Do not continue driving with an overheat- ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to If the engine overheats in section 6.

ORB045411N

CAUTION If the gauge moves beyond the nor- mal range area toward the H posi- tion, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

CAUTION Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine dam- age.

WARNING Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

Type A Type B

4 39

Features of your vehicle

Fuel gauge The fuel gauge indicates the approxi- mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in section 8. The fuel gauge is supplement- ed by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is near empty. On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

Trip computer The trip computer is a microcomputer controlling the driver information system. It displays information related to driving on the LCD screen when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the battery is disconnected, then all stored driving information (except odometer) is reset.

WARNING - Fuel gauge Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger. You must stop and obtain addition- al fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E level.

CAUTION Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damag- ing the catalytic converter.

ORB045034N ORBC040035

Type A Type B

Features of your vehicle

404

Odometer (mi. or km)

The odometer indicates the total dis- tance the vehicle has been driven. You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

Tripmeter (mi. or km)

TRIP A : Tripmeter A TRIP B : Tripmeter B This mode indicates the distance of indi- vidual trips selected since the last trip- meter reset. The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 9999.9 miles (0.0 to 9999.9 km). Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

ORB045036N ORB045037N

TRIP A

TRIP B

Average speed

Elapsed time

Distance to empty

Average fuel consumption

Instant fuel consumption

Type A Type B Type A Type B

4 41

Features of your vehicle

Distance to empty (mi. or km)

This mode indicates the estimated dis- tance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine. When the remaining distance is below 1 mile (1 km), "---" will be displayed and the dis- tance to empty indicator will blink. The meters working range is from 1 to 999 miles (1 to 999 km).

Average fuel consumption (if equipped) (MPG or l/100 km)

This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average econ- omy reset. The total fuel used is calculat- ed from the fuel consumption input. For an accurate calculation, drive more than 0.03 miles (50 m). Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the average fuel econo- my is being displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to zero (----). If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.6 MPH (1km/h) after being refueling, the average fuel economy will be cleared to zero (----).

Instant fuel consumption (MPG or l/100 km)

This mode calculates the instant fuel consumption every 2 seconds from the driving distance and quantity of fuel injection.

ORB045410N ORB045039N

Type A Type B Type A Type B

ORB045040N

Type A Type B

Features of your vehicle

424

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

This mode calculates the average speed of the vehicle since the last average speed reset. Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average speed keeps changing while the engine is running. Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the average speed is being displayed, clears the average speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time

This mode indicates the total time trav- eled since the last driving time reset. Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the driving time keeps increasing while the engine is running. The meters working range is from 00:00~99:59. Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second, when the driving time is being displayed, clears the driving time to zero (00:00).

Outside thermometer (if equipped) The current outside temperature is dis- played in 1C (1F) increments. The tem- perature range is between -40C ~ 60C (-40F ~ 140F). The outside temperature on the display

may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.

ORB045042N

Type A Type B

ORB045309N

Type A Type B

ORB045412N

Type A Type B

4 43

Features of your vehicle

Icy road warning light (if equipped) This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy when: Ignition ON Temperature range: approximately

below 39.2F (4C). The warning light will blink for 10 sec- onds and then illuminate. Also, the warn- ing chime will sound.

NOTICE If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud- den braking or sharp turning, etc.

Transaxle Shift Indicator Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator (if equipped) This indicator displays which shift lever is selected.

Park : P Reverse : R Neutral : N Drive : D Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator (if equipped) This indicator informs which gear is desired while driving to save fuel.

Shifting up : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Shifting down : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

For example : Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

ORBR045309

Type A Type B

ORB045405

Type A Type B

ORB045407

Type A Type B

Features of your vehicle

444

Warnings and indicators All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. After starting the engine, check to make sure that all warning lights are off. If any are still on, this indicates a situation that needs attention. When releasing the parking brake, the brake system warning light should go off. The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low.

ECO indicator

Active ECO system

When the active ECO is operating the ECO indicator is green. For more detailed information, refer to Active ECO in chapter 5.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion. This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is not working properly. If the SRS air bag warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or start- ed the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ECO

WARNING Don't keep watching the indicator while driving. It will distract you while driving and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury.

4 45

Features of your vehicle

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in approxi- mately 3 seconds if the system is operat- ing normally. If the ABS warning light remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, this indicates that there may be a malfunction with the ABS. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but with- out the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

If the ABS warning light turns on while driving

1.Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2.Turn on the engine again. 3. If the warning light illuminates and

turns off in approximately 3 seconds, the system is operating normally.

If the warning light does not turn off, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Electronic brake force distri- bution (EBD) system warning light

If these two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ABS and EBD system. In this case, your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING If the both ABS and brake warning lights are on and stay on, your vehi- cles brake system will not work normally during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. Have your vehi- cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- ble.

Features of your vehicle

464

NOTICE If the ABS warning light or EBD warn- ing light is on and stays on, the speedometer or odometer/tripmeter may not work. In this case, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

The driver's seat belt warning light and chime will activate to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" posi- tion.

*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with interval 24 seconds. If the driver's seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immedi- ately.

*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

Turn signal indicator

The blinking arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal system is indicated. Your dealer should be consult- ed for repairs.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head- lights are on and in the high beam posi- tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Tail light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the tail lights are on.

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed

Light-Blink Chime- Sound

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled Unbuckled

Below 3 mph (5 km/h)

6 seconds None

3 mph~ 6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph (10 km/h)

6 sec. on / 24 sec. off (11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph (10 km/h)

Below 3 mph (5 km/h)

6 seconds *1

Stop *2

4 47

Features of your vehicle

Engine oil pressure warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low. If the warning light illuminates while driv- ing: 1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop. 2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. The warning light should go off when the parking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low. If the warning light remains on: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle. 2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required. Then check all brake components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. Have the vehicle towed to any author- ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys- tem inspection and necessary repairs.

CAUTION If the engine is not stopped imme- diately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

CAUTION If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is run- ning, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there is a serious malfunc- tion. If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer before the car is driven again.

Features of your vehicle

484

Your vehicle is equipped with a dual- diagonal braking system.This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the brake circuits is damaged or malfunctions. With only one of the circuits working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so. To check bulb operation, check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) indicator Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

The low tire pressure telltale/TPMS mal- function indicator comes on for 3 sec- onds after the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu- minate after it blinks for approximately 1 minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If this occurs, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

For details, refer to the TPMS in section 6.

WARNING Driving the vehicle with a warning light on is dangerous. If the brake warning light remains on, have the brakes checked and repaired imme- diately by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Low tire pres- sure

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on tires with low pressure will cause the tires to overheat and fail.

WARNING - Safe stopping The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.

If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe posi- tion off the road.

4 49

Features of your vehicle

Charging system warning light

This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system. If the warning light comes on while the vehicle is in motion: 1. Drive to the nearest safe location. 2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break- age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob- lem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem as soon as possible.

NOTICE When the charging system warning light comes on or the voltage is low (when the alternator (or battery) does not operate normally or it malfunc- tions), the steering wheel may get heavy and become difficult to operate and may required increased steering effort.

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

This light comes on when the front fog lights are ON.

Trunk lid / tailgate open warning light

This warning light illuminates when the trunk lid / tailgate is not closed securely with the ignition in any position.

Door open warning light

This indicator illuminates when a door is not closed securely.

Key reminder warning chime (if equipped) If the drivers door is opened while the ignition key is left in the ignition switch (ACC or LOCK position), the key reminder warning chime will sound. This helps prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the drivers door is closed.

Features of your vehicle

504

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below E can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter.

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components. If this light illuminates while driving, it indi- cates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emis- sion control system. This light will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi- tion, and will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, take your vehicle to your near- est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked. Generally, your vehicle will continue to be drivable, but have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.

CAUTION Prolonged driving with the

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi- nated may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.

If the Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates or blinks, potential catalytic converter damage is possible. This could result in loss of engine power. Have the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

4 51

Features of your vehicle

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) indicator

The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 sec- onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions. Under normal driv- ing conditions, the ESC light will remain off. When a slippery or low traction con- dition is encountered, the ESC will oper- ate, and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating. The ESC indicator stays on when the ESC may have a malfunction. Take your car to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

ESC OFF indicator

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode, press the ESC OFF button. The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated.

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled. The cruise indicator light in the instru- ment cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON-OFF button on the steering wheel is pushed. The indicator light turns off when the cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed again. For more information about the use of cruise control, refer to Cruise control system in section 5.

CRUISE

Features of your vehicle

524

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when the cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is ON. The cruise SET indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise con- trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the system is disengaged.

Electric power steering (EPS) system warning light

This indicator light comes on after the ignition key is turned to the ON position and then it will go out. This light also comes on when the EPS needs repairs. If it comes on while driv- ing, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Steering effort may increase significantly if this lamp illuminates. See EPS system in this section.

Engine coolant tempera- ture warning light

The warning light illuminates if the tem- perature of the engine coolant is above 2574.5F (1252.5C). Do not continue driving with an overheat- ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to Overheating in section 6.

NOTICE If the engine coolant temperature warn- ing light illuminates, it indicates over- heating that may damage the engine.

Fuel cap open warning indicator (if equipped)

This warning light indicates the fuel filler cap is not tightened securely. Always make sure that the fuel filler cap is tight.

SET

4 53

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors, the battery saver function does not operate. Therefore, it causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before get- ting out of the vehicle.

The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emer- gency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible. The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition switch. To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch a second time.

Battery saver function (if equipped) The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis- charged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lights will be turned off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, per- form the following: 1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlight delay (if equipped) If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the drivers door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 sec- onds. The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmit- ter twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or AUTO position. However, if you turn the light switch to the AUTO position when it is dark outside, the headlights will not be turned off.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

ORB040045

LIGHTING

Features of your vehicle

544

Headlight welcome function (if equipped) When the headlight switch is in the ON or AUTO position and all doors (and tail- gate) are closed and locked, if you press the door unlock button on the transmitter, the headlights will come on for about 15 seconds. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the function can only operate at night. At this time, if you press the door unlock button again or door lock button on the transmitter, the headlights will turn off immediately.

Tail lamp warning chime (if equipped) If you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position with the tail lamps ON and the driver's door in an open position, the warning chime will sound. To stop the chime, perform one of the fol- lowing: 1) Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-

tion. 2) Turn the tail lamps OFF. 3) Close the driver's door.

Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position. To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the fol- lowing positions: (1) OFF position (2) Parking light position (3) Headlight position (4) Auto light position (if equipped)

CAUTION To prevent the battery from being discharged, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

ORB044046N

Type A

OXM049110

Type B

4 55

Features of your vehicle

Parking light position ( ) When the light switch is in the parking light position, the tail, position and license plate lights will turn on and the tail light indicator will turn on.

Headlight position ( ) When the light switch is in the headlight position the head, tail, license and instru- ment panel lights will turn on.

NOTICE The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped) When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehi- cle.

ORB044360N

ORB040047D

Type A

OAM049041

Type B

ORB040048D

Type A

OAM049042

Type B

Features of your vehicle

564

High beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams. The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on. To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

CAUTION Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto-light system control.

Dont clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work prop- erly.

WARNING Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other dri- ver's vision.

ORB040049D

Type A

OAM049044

Type B

4 57

Features of your vehicle

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change sig- nals The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). Green arrow indicators on the instru- ment panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed.

If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position. To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF posi- tion when released. If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

One-touch lane change function To activate an one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3 times.

NOTICE If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

ORB040050D

Type A

OAM049043

Type B

OAM049045

Type B ORB040051D

Type A

Features of your vehicle

584

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to help provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.The fog lights will turn on when fog light switch (1) is turned to ON after the headlights are turned on. To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch to OFF.

CAUTION When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor or unnecessary battery and generator drain could occur.

ORB040052D

Type A

OAM049046N

Type B

4 59

Features of your vehicle

WIPERS AND WASHERS A : Wiper speed control

MIST Single wipe OFF Off INT Intermittent wipe

(if equipped) LO Low wiper speed HI High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment (if equipped)

C : Wash with brief wipes (front) (if equipped)

ORBC040054E

ORB044054

OAM049100L

4 Door Type A

Type B

Type C

OTA040053

ORB044368

OAM049100N

Type B

Type C

5 Door Type A

Features of your vehicle

604

D : Rear wiper/washer control Wash with brief wipes

ON Continuous wipe

INT Intermittent wipe

OFF Off

E : Wash with brief wipes

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON. MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the

lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation INT (if equipped) :

Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in a light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

LO : Normal wiper speed HI : Fast wiper speed

NOTICE If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

OAM049048N

ORB044369

5 Door Type A

Type B

Type C

CAUTION When starting the vehicle in winter, set the wiper switch in the OFF position. Otherwise, wipers may operate and ice may damage the windshield wiper blades. Always remove all snow and ice and defrost the windshield properly prior to operating the windshield wipers.

4 61

Features of your vehicle

ORB045377 ORB045375

4 Door Type A

Type B

Type C Type C

5 Door Type A

Type B

Windshield washers To use the windshield washer, pull the lever gently toward you in the OFF position. - Type A, Type C: The washer fluid will spray on the windshield and the wipers will

operate 1~3 cycles. - Type B: The washer fluid will spray on the windshield but the wipers will not operate. Use this function when the windshield is dirty. The spray operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not suffi- cient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir. The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the pas- senger side.

CAUTION To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

WARNING Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on contact with the windshield and obscure your vision.

CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

Features of your vehicle

624

Rear window wiper and washer switch (5 Door) The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

ORB045376

5 Door Type A

Type B

Type C

OXM049125

Type C

4 63

Features of your vehicle

Automatic turn off function (if equipped) The interior lights automatically turn off approximately 20 minutes after the igni- tion switch is turned off.

Map lamp Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

DOOR : In the DOOR position, the map lamp and the room lamp come on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the trans- mitter, the map lamp and the room lamp come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not open. The map lamp and the room lamp goes out gradu- ally after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the map lamp and the room lamp will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK posi- tion, the map lamp and the room lamp stay on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the map lamp and the room lamp stay on continuously.

INTERIOR LIGHT

WARNING Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. Accidents could happen because the view may be obscured by interior lights.

CAUTION Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running. It may cause battery discharge.

ORB040057

Features of your vehicle

644

ON : Map lamp and room lamp stay on at all times.

OFF : The lights turn off even if a door is opened. When the lamp is turned ON by press-

ing the lens (1) the lamp does not turn off even if the switch (2) is in the OFF position.

Room lamp ON (1): In the ON position, the light stays on at all times.

DOOR (2) : In the DOOR position, the light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the trans- mitter, the light comes on for approxi- mately 30 seconds as long as any door is not open. The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the light will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the light stays on continuously.

OFF (3) : In the OFF position, the light stays off at all times even when a door is open.

ORB040361

4 65

Features of your vehicle

Luggage room lamp The luggage room lamp comes on when the trunk lid/tailgate is opened.

ORB041402

5 Door ORBC040059

4 Door CAUTION

The luggage room lamp comes on as long as the trunk lid/tailgate opens. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the trunk lid/tailgate securely after using the luggage room.

Features of your vehicle

664

DEFROSTER

NOTICE If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to Windshield defrosting and defogging in this section.

Rear window defroster The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the rear window, while the engine is running. To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON. If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before oper- ating the rear defroster. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

Side view mirror defroster (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the side view mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the conduc- tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

ORB040063L

4 67

Features of your vehicle

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Temperature control knob

2. Fan speed control knob

3. Air conditioning button

4. Air intake control button

5. Mode selection knob

ORB040065N

Features of your vehicle

684

Heating and air conditioning 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling; - Heating: - Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

ORB040066L

4 69

Features of your vehicle

Mode selection The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the venti- lation system. Air can be directed to the floor, dash- board outlets, or windshield. Five sym- bols are used to represent Five, Face, Bi- Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side win- dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

ORB040067

Features of your vehicle

704

MAX A/C-Level (B, D, E)

To select the MAX A/C, turn the temper- ature knob to the extreme the left. Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

NOTICE This setting should be used briefly to help quickly cool the interior. After the interior temperature has cooled suffi- ciently, turn the temperature knob away from the MAX A/C position to a com- fortable setting.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the horizontal thumb- wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to the maximum position. To open the vent, rotate it right to the desired position. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flow- ing from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in the pas- senger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm and hot air or left position for cooler air.

ORB040356 ORB040069ORB040068

4 71

Features of your vehicle

Air intake control The air intake control is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recircu- lated air position. To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passen- ger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from out- side and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fog- ging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger com- partment may become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air con- ditioning with the recirculated air posi- tion selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

ORB040070

WARNING Continue using the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating sys- tem on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temper- ature.

Continue using the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Features of your vehicle

724

Fan speed control The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation. The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed. Setting the fan speed control knob to the 0 position turns off the fan.

To turn off the blowers To turn off the blowers, turn the fan speed control knob to the "0" position.

Air conditioning Press the A/C button to turn the air con- ditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

ORB040073N ORB040354NORB043099N

4 73

Features of your vehicle

System operation Ventilation 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

Operation Tips

To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the venti- lation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irrita- tion has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

To prevent interior fog on the wind- shield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air condi- tioning system, and adjust the temper- ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant. 1. Start the engine. Press the air condi-

tioning button. 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position. 4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position (the MAX A/C position), then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

Features of your vehicle

744

NOTICE When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside tempera- tures are high. Air conditioning sys- tem operation may cause engine over- heating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning sys- tem off if the temperature gauge indi- cates engine overheating.

When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehi- cle by operating the air conditioning system.

During air conditioning system opera- tion, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

When using the air conditioning sys- tem, you may notice clear water drip- ping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehi- cle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.

During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system opera- tion characteristic.

If you operate air conditioner exces- sively, the difference between the tem- perature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed con- trol to the lower speed.

4 75

Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter (if equipped) The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehi- cle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this hap- pens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the amount of air con- ditioner refrigerant and compres- sor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

OHM048209

Outside air

Recirculated air

Climate control air filter

Blower Evaporator core Heater core

WARNING The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service may cause serious injury to the person performing the service.

Features of your vehicle

764

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. AUTO (automatic control) button

2. OFF button

3. Temperature control knob

4. A/C display

5. Air intake control button

6. Fan speed control knob

7. Air conditioning button

8. Mode selection button

9. Front windshield defrost button

ORB040340N

4 77

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air condi- tioning 1. Press the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled auto- matically according to the temperature setting.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

NOTICE To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following: - Mode selection button - Front windshield defrost button

(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)

- Fan speed control button The selected function will be con- trolled manually while other functions operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate con- trol, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 23C (73F).

ORB040342 ORB040341

Features of your vehicle

784

NOTICE Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air condition- ing The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button except the AUTO button while using automatic oper- ation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically. 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling; - Heating: - Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con- vert to full automatic control of the sys- tem.

Mode selection The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the venti- lation system. The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the Manual cli- mate control system.

ORB040347NORB040353

4 79

Features of your vehicle

Floor & Defrost

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Face-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side win- dow defrosters.

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the horizontal thumb- wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to the maximum position. To open the vent, rotate it right to the desired position. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

ORB040355N ORB040068

Features of your vehicle

804

Temperature control The temperature will increase to the maximum by turning the knob to the right extremely. The temperature will decrease to the minimum by turning the knob to the left extremely. When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by 1F (0.5C). When set to the lowest temperature set- ting, the air conditioning will operate con- tinuously.

Temperature conversion (if equipped)

If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, the temperature mode dis- play will reset to Fahrenheit. This is a normal condition.You can switch the temperature mode between Fahrenheit to Celsius as follows; While pressing the OFF button, depress the AUTO button for 4 seconds or more. The display will change from Fahrenheit to Celsius, or from Celsius to Fahrenheit.

Air intake control This is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

ORB040345NORB040341

4 81

Features of your vehicle

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compart- ment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from out- side and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fog- ging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger com- partment may become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air con- ditioning with the recirculated air posi- tion selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Fan speed control The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the fan speed control knob. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

ORB040344N

WARNING Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

Features of your vehicle

824

Air conditioning Push the A/C button to turn the air condi- tioning system on (indicator light will illu- minate). Push the button again to turn the air con- ditioning system off.

OFF mode Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli- mate control system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake but- tons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.

ORB040343ORB040346N

4 83

Features of your vehicle

For maximum defrosting, set the tem- perature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, out- side rear view mirrors, and all side win- dows.

Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-

tion. 2. Select desired temperature. 3. Select the or position. 4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically. If the position is selected, air conditioning will also be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and/or outside (fresh) air position are not selected auto- matically, press the corresponding button manually.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshield heating

Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The dif- ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind- shield could cause the outer sur- face of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to the lower speed.

ORB040075N

Features of your vehicle

844

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-

tion. 2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position. 3. Select the position. 4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-

tion. 2. Select desired temperature. 3. Press the defrost button ( ). 4. The air conditioning will be turned on

according to the detected ambient tem- perature and outside (fresh) air posi- tion will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatical- ly, adjust the corresponding button man- ually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position. 2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position. 3. Press the defrost button ( ). 4. The air conditioning will be turned on

according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

ORB040348N ORB040349NORB040076N

4 85

Features of your vehicle

Defogging logic To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled auto- matically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the follow- ing.

Manual climate control system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. 2. Select the defrost button ( ). 3. Press the air intake control button at

least 5 times within 3 seconds. The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Automatic climate control system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. 2. Press the defrost button ( ). 3. While holding the air conditioning

(A/C) button pressed, press the air intake control button (recirculated air position) at least 5 times within 3 sec- onds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, it resets to the defog logic status.

ORB040077N ORB040350N

Features of your vehicle

864

Automatic Ventilation (if equipped) When the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the engine is running and temperature is below 59F (15C) with the recirculated air position selected more than five minutes, the air intake position will be automatically changed to the outside (fresh) air position. To cancel or reset the automatic ventilation, do the following.

Manual climate control system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position. 2. Select Face Level mode. 3. While holding the air conditioning

(A/C) button pressed, press the air intake control button (recirculated air position) at least 5 times within 3 sec- onds.

If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, it resets to the automatic ven- tilation status.

Automatic climate control system 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. 2. Select Face Level mode. 3. While holding the air conditioning

(A/C) button pressed, press the air intake control button (recirculated air position) at least 5 times within 3 sec- onds.

If the battery has been discharged or dis- connected, it resets to the automatic ven- tilation status.

ORB045077N ORB045350N

4 87

Features of your vehicle

These compartments can be used to store small items.

Center console storage To open the center console storage, pull up the lever.

Sliding armrest (if equipped) To move forward Grab the front portion of the armrest (1) then pull it forward.

To move rearward Push the armrest rearward with your palm.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING - Flammable materials

Do not store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flamma- ble/explosive materials in the vehi- cle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

CAUTION To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Always keep the storage com- partment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely.

WARNING Do not grap the front portion of the armrest (1) when moving the arm- rest rearward. It may pinch your fin- gers.

ORB040351 ORB040362

Features of your vehicle

884

Glove box To open the glove box, push the button and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.

Sunglass holder (if equipped) To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compart- ment door with the lenses facing out. Push to close.

WARNING Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold- er. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, pos- sibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sun- glass holder.

Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder to prevent breakage or deformation of glasses. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.

CAUTION Do not keep food in the glove box for a long time.

ORB040081ORB040080

4 89

Features of your vehicle

Luggage net (holder) (if equipped) To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net.

OYF049225

CAUTION To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compart- ment.

WARNING Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over- stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage nets recoil path. DO NOT use when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

Features of your vehicle

904

INTERIOR FEATURES Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

Sunvisor Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows. To use a sunvisor, pull it downward. To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or rearward (4). The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold- ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

WARNING - Hot liquids Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you may burn your- self. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

To reduce the risk of personal injury in the event of sudden stop or collision, do not place uncov- ered or unsecured bottles, glass- es, cans, etc., in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion.

ORB044085N

WARNING Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a vehicle that is heated up. It may explode.

ORB040078

CAUTION Do not place uncovered cups in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the liquid spills, electric systems may malfunction.

WARNING For your safety, do not obstruct your vision when using the sunvisor.

4 91

Features of your vehicle

Power outlet The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

CAUTION Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for pro- longed periods of time with the engine off could cause the bat- tery to discharge.

Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in elec- tric capacity. If not, it could lead to an overheated power outlet or electric wiring in the vehicle and electric systems may malfunc- tion.

Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

Close the cover when not in use. Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicles power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING Do not put a finger or a foreign ele- ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may get an electric shock.

ORB041084N

(Continued) Make sure that the electric

devices are plugged in securely. If not, it could cause a malfunction of electric systems.

If you use an electric device with a battery, electric current may flow from the electric device into the vehicle and may cause a mal- function of electric systems. Only use electric devices which could prevent inverse current.

Features of your vehicle

924

Digital clock (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or relat- ed fuses are disconnected, you must reset the time. When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the clock buttons operate as follows:

Setup the clock With audio off

1. Press the [SETUP] button until the clock of the display blinks.

2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1) and press it.

With audio on

1. Press the [SETUP] button. 2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turning

the knob(1) and press it. 3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)

and press it. Clothes hanger (if equipped) To use the hanger, pull down the upper portion of hanger.WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driv- ing. You may lose your steering control and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury or death.

ORB044086N OUN026348

CAUTION Do not hang heavy clothes, because it may damage the hook.

4 93

Features of your vehicle

Floor mat anchor(s) When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

Cargo area cover (if equipped) Use the cover to hide items stored in the cargo area. The cargo area cover will be lifted when the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the strap (1) from holder if you want to return the cover to original position. To remove the cargo area cover completely, lift the cover to a 50-degree angle and pull it out to the full (2). For installation of the cover, reverse the removal procedure.

OMD040195N

WARNING The floor mat must be properly anchored so that it will not interfere with the operation of the accelera- tor pedal. Any interference with the accelerator pedal could cause the accelerator pedal to be unable to return to the idle position. A pedal that cannot return to the idle posi- tion could lead to an accident which may result in severe person- al injury or death.

WARNING The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle, so that it will not inter- fere with the pedal. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicles floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicles floor mat anchors.

Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rub- ber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each posi- tion.

IMPORTANT Your vehicle was manufactured with drivers side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI rec- ommends that only the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

ORB041403

Features of your vehicle

944

Aux, USB and iPod port If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod

port, you can use an aux port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod port to plug in an iPod.

NOTICE When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology hands-free (if equipped) You can use a Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone. Detailed information for the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology hands-free is described in the Audio section in this chapter or in the manual supplied sepa- rately.

ORB044087N

CAUTION When you return the cargo area

cover to its original position, hold the cover and lower it.

Do not operate the vehicle with the cover removed. It may dam- age the cover.

The cargo area cover may be lift- ed when the tailgate is opened. Ensure that the luggage on the cover is moved to a safe place.

Since the cargo area cover may be damaged or malformed, do not apply excessive force to the cover or do not put the heavy loads on it.

WARNING Do not place objects on the cargo

area cover while driving. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking.

Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is designed for luggage only.

Maintain the balance of the vehi- cle and locate the weight as far forward as possible.

4 95

Features of your vehicle

Mounting bracket for roof carrier (if equipped) To install or remove a roof carrier, you can use the mounting bracket and cover on the roof. When you install a roof carrier, use approved HYUNDAI accessories and do the following procedure. 1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade

driver) into the slot and slide the cover toward the arrow on the cover.

2. Rotate the cover half way and insert the cover on the roof hole as the illus- tration.

NOTICE To prevent losing the roof carrier cover, install the cover on the roof before you install the roof carrier.

3. After using the roof carrier, install the cover back on the roof in the reverse order.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

OED046091OED046090

WARNING Use a coin or flat blade driver when you remove the roof carrier cover. If you use your fingernail, it may injure your finger.

Features of your vehicle

964

NOTICE If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo onto the roof in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation.

WARNING The vehicle center of gravity will

be higher when items are loaded onto the roof. Avoid sudden starts, braking, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers or high speeds that may result in loss of vehicle control or rollover resulting in an accident.

Always drive slowly and turn cor- ners carefully when carrying items on the roof. Severe wind updrafts, caused by passing vehicles or natural causes, can cause sudden upward pressure on items loaded on the roof. This is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as wood panels or mattresses. This could cause the items to fall off the roof and cause damage to your vehi- cle or others around you.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, check fre- quently before or while driving to make sure the items on the roof are securely fastened.

CAUTION When carrying cargo on the roof,

take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo does not damage the roof of the vehicle.

When carrying large objects on the roof, make sure they do not exceed the overall roof length or width.

4 97

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE If you install an after market HID (high intensity discharge) head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic device may malfunction.

Antenna Roof antenna Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna is a removable type. To remove the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash, remove surely the antenna by rotating it counter-clockwise. If not, the antenna may be dam- aged.

When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tight- ened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper recep- tion. But it could be folded or removed when parking the vehi- cle or when loading cargo on the roof rack.

When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.

ORB040088

Features of your vehicle

984

Steering wheel audio control (if equipped) The steering wheel audio control button is installed for your convenience.

VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1) Press the up button (+) to increase vol-

ume. Press the down button (-) to decrease

volume.

MUTE (2) Press the MUTE button to cancel the

sound. Press the MUTE button again to acti-

vate the sound.

MODE (3) Press the MODE button to select Radio, CD (Compact Disc).

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (4) If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for 0.8 second or more, it will work as fol- lows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for less than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION select buttons.

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

Detailed information for audio control buttons is included in the following pages in this section.

CAUTION Do not operate audio remote con- trol buttons simultaneously.

ORB040089

PA710RBU SW

Type A

4

1 2

3

1 3

4 Type B

4 99

Features of your vehicle

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle.This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best pos- sible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, close- ness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.

JBM002

AM reception

JBM001

FM reception

Features of your vehicle

1004

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. short distances from the station. Also, FM sig- nals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listen- ing conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the trans- mitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering nois- es to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the distur- bance clears.

Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful sig- nal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clear- est signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflect- ed signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM005JBM004

4 101

Features of your vehicle

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equip- ment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

Caring for disc If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to ventilate before using the system.

It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA files without permission. Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.

Do not apply volatile agents, such as benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for ana- logue disc onto CDs.

To prevent the disc surface from get- ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges or the center hole only.

Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback (wipe it from the center to the outside edge).

Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.

Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert more than one CD at a time).

Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt.

Depending on the type of CD-R/CD- RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate normally according to the manufactur- ing companies. In such circumstances, continued use may cause malfunctions to your audio system.

CAUTION When using a communication sys- tem such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa- rate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehi- cle's electrical system and adverse- ly affect safe operation of the vehi- cle.

WARNING Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

Features of your vehicle

1024

NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD Some copy protected CDs, which do not comply with international audio CD standards (Red Book), may not play on your car audio. Please note that inabili- ties to properly play a copy protected CD may indicate that the CD is defec- tive, not the CD player.

NOTE: Order of playing files (folders) : 1. Song playing order : to sequen-

tially. 2. Folder playing order : If no song file is contained in the fold-

er, that folder is not displayed.

4 103

Features of your vehicle

WARNING Do not stare at the screen while

driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.

Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after park- ing the vehicle.

Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunc- tion.

(Continued)

(Continued) Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indi- cate product malfunction. Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents(fires, electric shock) or product mal- functions.

Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

Do not stop or park in parking- restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on. Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in battery discharge.

CAUTION Operating the device while driv-

ing could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external sur- roundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device.

Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to accidents.

Pay attention to the volume set- ting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme vol- ume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1044

(Continued) Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.

When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chem- ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality dete- rioration.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. Spilling bever- ages may lead to system mal- function.

In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of pur- chase or After Service center.

Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration.

4 105

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE - USING THE USB DEVICE

To use an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.

If you start the engine when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.)

If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.

The System may not play unauthenti- cated MP3 or WMA files. 1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

Take precautions for static electric- ity when connecting or disconnect- ing the external USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued) An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable. Depending on the condition of the

external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrec- ognizable.

When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recog- nized.

Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.

USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recog- nizable.

Make sure the USB connection ter- minal does not come in contact with the human body or other objects.

If you repeatedly connect or discon- nect the USB device in a short peri- od of time, it may break the device.

You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued) If you disconnect the external USB

device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)

Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device.

Do not use the USB device for pur- poses other than playing music files.

Playing videos through the USB is not supported.

Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1064

(Continued) Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.

Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE- MENT) are not recognizable.

The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage device.

Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connector products.

(Continued) If you use devices such as a USB hub

purchased separately, the vehicles audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.

Devices such as MP3 Player/ Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrec- ognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices.

USB HDD or USB types liable to con- nection failures due to vehicle vibra- tions are not supported. (i-stick type)

Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

4 107

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE - USING THE iPod DEVICE

iPhone is a registered trademark of Apple inc.

Some iPod models may not sup- port communication protocol and files may not properly play. Supported iPod models: - iPhone 3GS/4 - iPod touch 1st~4th generation - iPod nano 1st~6th generation - iPod classic

The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be different from the order searched in the audio system.

If the iPod is disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPod manual)

An iPod may not operate normal- ly on low battery.

(Continued)

(Continued) Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected through the Bluetooth Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio Bluetooth Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone Bluetooth

Wireless Technology). The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

To use iPod features within the audio, use the cable provided upon purchasing an iPod device.

Skipping or improper operation may occur depending on the char- acteristics of your iPod/ iPhone

device. If your iPhone is connected to

both the Bluetooth Wireless Technology and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone, select the Dock con- nector or Bluetooth Wireless Technology to change the sound output (source).

(Continued)

(Continued) When connecting iPod with the

iPod Power Cable, insert the con- nector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted com- pletely, communications between iPod and audio may be interrupt- ed.

When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod when adjust- ing the audio systems volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod.

When not using iPod with car audio, detach the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.

Features of your vehicle

1084

NOTICE - Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of such marks is under license. A Bluetooth enabled call phone is required to use Bluetooth wireless technology.

Bluetooth Wirelss Technology phone compatibility can be checked by visit- ing www. hyundaiusa.com and under the SERVICE & PARTS - BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILITY menu.

NOTICE - BEFORE USING THE Bluetooth HANDSFREE

What is Bluetooth ? Bluetooth refers to a short-distance

wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz frequency to connect various devices within a cer- tain distance.

Supported within PCs, external devices, Bluetooth phones, PDAs, various electronic devices, and auto- motive environments, Bluetooth allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a con- nector cable.

Bluetooth Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with Bluetooth mobile phones through the audio sys- tem.

Bluetooth Handsfree may not be sup- ported in some mobile phones. To learn more about mobile device compatibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE DRIVING

Connecting the head unit with a Bluetooth phone allows the user to conveniently make and receive calls and use contacts. Before using Bluetooth , carefully read the contents of this users manual.

Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive operations while driving.

Viewing the screen for prolonged peri- ods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

4 109

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE - WHEN CONNECT- ING A Bluetooth PHONE

Before connecting the head unit with the mobile phone, check to see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth features.

Even if the phone supports Bluetooth, the phone will not be found during device searches if the phone has been set to hidden state or the Bluetooth power is turned off. Disable the hidden state or turn on the Bluetooth power prior to searching/connecting with the Head unit.

Bluetooth phone is automatically con- nected when the ignition on.

If you do not want automatic connec- tion with your Bluetooth device, turn off the Bluetooth feature within your mobile phone.

The Handsfree call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone.

(Continued)

(Continued) Park the vehicle when connecting the

head unit with the mobile phone. Bluetooth connection may become

intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones. Follow these steps to try again. 1. Within the mobile phone, turn the Bluetooth function off/on and try again.

2. Turn the mobile phone power Off/On and try again.

3. Completely remove the mobile phone battery, reboot, and then again.

4. Reboot the Audio System and try again.

5. Delete all paired devices, pair and try again.

Handsfree call quality and volume may differ depending on the model of your mobile phone.

Features of your vehicle

1104

NOTICE - USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION

When using the voice recognition fea- ture, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.

Be aware that during the operation of the voice recognition system, pressing any key other than the key termi- nate voice recognition mode.

For superior voice recognition per- formance, position the microphone used for voice recognition above the head of the drivers seat and maintain a proper position when saying com- mands.

Within the following situations, voice recognition may not function properly due to external sound. - When the windows and sunroof are

open - When the wind of the cooling / heat-

ing device is strong - When entering and passing through

tunnels (Continued)

(Continued) - When driving on rugged and

uneven roads - During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms) Phone related voice commands can be

used only when a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected.

When making calls by stating a name, the corresponding contact must be downloaded and stored within the audio system.

After downloading the Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone book, it takes some times to convert the phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not properly operate.

Pronounce the voice commands natu- rally and clearly as if in a normal con- versation.

4 111

Features of your vehicle

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences. Before reading the manual, check the following.

Press the key in FM Radio screen. 1. If you can find FM <87.5~107.9>on the screen,

(Go to 4-112 page)

2. If you can find FM <89.1>on the screen, (Go to 4-155 page)

Features of your vehicle

1124

CD Player : AC180SBAN,AC180SBKN,AC1B0SBAN,AC1B0SBKN (Type A)

No logo will be shown if the Bluetooth Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4 113

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit (for Bluetooth equipped model)

1. (EJECT) Ejects the disc.

2. Changes to FM, AM, XM mode. Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.

In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned . When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or keys ~ to select the desired mode.

3. Changes to CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode. Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or keys ~ to select the desired mode.

4. (for Bluetooth Wireless Technology equipped model)

Operates Phone Screen When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed

5. Radio Mode : Automatically searches

for broadcast frequencies. CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec- onds): Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec- onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or pre- vious song(file)

The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

6. PWR/VOL knob Power : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knob Volume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

SEEK TRACK

PHONE

61

On

MEDIA

6 1

On

RADIO

Features of your vehicle

1144

7. Each time the button is shortly pressed

(under 0.8 seconds), it sets the screen Off Screen On Screen Off

Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

8. Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec- onds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Press the key again to contin- ue listening to the current frequency.

SiriusXM Radio: does not support the Preset scan feature.

CD, USB, My Music mode - Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

Press the key again to contin- ue listening to the current song (file).

9. Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes.

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec- onds): Moves to the Clock setting mode.

10. Displays menus for the current mode.

11. Radio Mode

- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search

12. TUNE knob Radio mode : Changes frequency by

turning the knob left/right. CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

13. ~ (Preset) Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-

nels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)

CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode - : Repeat - : Random

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

2 RDM

1 RPT

61

CAT FOLDER

MENU

SETUP CLOCK

SCAN

SCAN

61

SCAN

DISP

4 115

Features of your vehicle

Audio Head Unit

14. Changes to FM mode. Each time the key is pressed, the

mode changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM.

15. Changes to XM mode.

SAT

FM/AM

Features of your vehicle

1164

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display] Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up [Mode Pop up] Changes / selection mode During On state, press the or

key to display the mode change pop up screen.

Media Display When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from Folder/File or Album/Artist/Song.

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound] Select menu through TUNE knob

SETUP CLOCK

MEDIA RADIO

OffOn

SETUP CLOCK

4 117

Features of your vehicle

Sound Settings This menu allows you to set the Bass, Middle, Treble and the Sound Fader and Balance. Select [Sound Settings] Select menu through TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob left/right to set Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound

tone. Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader

and balance. Default : Restores default settings. Back : While adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control This feature is used to automatically con- trol the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle. Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in [On / Off] of TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume Adjusts voice recognition volume. Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set vol- ume of TUNE knob

Features of your vehicle

1184

CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Clock] through TUNE knob or key Select menu through TUNE knob

Clock Settings This menu is used to set the time. Select [Clock Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute].

Calendar Settings This menu is used to set the date (MM/DD/YYYY). Select [Calendar Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the next setting. (Set in order of Year/Month/Day)

Time Format This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set /

through TUNE knob

: Displays time/date on screen : Turn off.Off

On

Off On

3

SETUP CLOCK

4 119

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select [System] Select menu through TUNE knob

Memory Information Displays currently used memory and total system memory. Select [Memory Information] OK The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

Prompt Feedback This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes. Select [Prompt Feedback] Set through

TUNE knob Normal(On) : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailed instruc- tions during voice command operation.

Expert(Off) : This mode is for expert users and omits some information dur- ing voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instruc- tions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language. Select [Language] Set through TUNE knob

The system will reboot after the lan- guage is changed.

Language support by region - English, Francais, Espanol

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1204

RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUSXMTM

SEEK Press the key Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Changes the frequency. Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.

Preset SEEK Press the ~ key Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from ~ will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN Press the key Shortly pressing the key : The broad-

cast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast fre- quency.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual search Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency. FM : Changes by 200KHz AM : Changes by 10KHz

61

SCAN

61

61

SEEK TRACK

4 121

Features of your vehicle

MENU Within key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store Press the key Set [A.Store] through TUNE knob or key. Saves broadcasts with superior recep- tion to ~ keys. If no frequen- cies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

61

1 MENU

MENU

Features of your vehicle

1224

Satellite Radio channels: SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio offers 150+ channels with 100% commercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk and enter- tainment, available nationwide in your vehicle. For more information and a com- plete list of SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXMTM at 1-800-643- 2112.

Satellite Radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your vehi- cle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satel- lite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance: Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possi- ble.

Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio service: SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio is a subscrip- tion-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installa- tion in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio sys- tem include: Hardware and an introductory trial sub-

scription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXMTM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only). For information on extended subscrip- tion terms, contact SiriusXMTM at 1- 866-635-2349.

NOTE: All SiriusXMTM services require a sub- scription, sold separately or as a package, after 3-month trial included with vehicle purchase or lease. If you decide to continue your SiriusXMTM

service at the end of your trial sub- scription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then- current rates until you call us at 1-866- 635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. Other fees and taxes apply. All fees and program- ming are subject to change. Sirius satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. Certain channels are not avail- able on our Internet radio service or on mobile devices. 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXMTM Radio Inc. All rights reserved

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio information

4 123

Features of your vehicle

SiriusXMTM RADIO

Using SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio Your vehicle is equipped with a 3 month complimentary period of SiriusXMTM

Satellite Radio. XM provides access to over 130 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

SEEK Press the key Shortly pressing the key: select previ-

ous or next channel. Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): continuously move to previ- ous or next channel.

If the Category icon is displayed, channels are changed within the cur- rent category.

SCAN Press the key Shortly pressing the key: Previews

each broadcast for 5 seconds each Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the current frequency If the Category icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the cur- rent category.

Category Press the key Set through the TUNE knob

The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.

In the Category List Mode, press the key to navigate category

list. Press the tune knob to select the low-

est channel in the highlighted category. If channel is selected by selecting cat-

egory, then the CATEGORY icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

Preset Press the ~ key Shortly pressing the key: Plays the fre-

quency saved in the corresponding key.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from ~ will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

61

61

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1244

Tune Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the

channel number or scrolls category list. Press TUNE knob : Selects the

menu.

Menu Select category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the key Select [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key

Info (Information)

Displays the Artist/Song info of the cur- rent song.

1

MENU

4 125

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE : AUDIO CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPOD / MY MUSIC

Press the key to change the mode in order of CDUSB(iPod)AUX My MusicBT Audio. The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted.

The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

Repeat While song (file) is playing (RPT) key Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode: RPT on screen To repeat one song (press the key :

Repeats the current song. MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen To repeat folder (pressing twice):

repeats all files within the current fold- er.

Press the key again to turn off repeat.

Random While song (file) is playing (RDM) key Audio CD, iPod, My Music mode: RDM on screen Random (press the key : Plays all

songs in random order.

2 RDM

1 RPT

1 RPT

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1264

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen Folder Random (press the key : Plays

all files within the current folder in ran- dom order.

MP3 CD, USB mode : ALL RDM on screen All Random (pressing twice): Plays all

files in random order. Press the key again to turn off

repeat.

Changing Song/File While song (file) is playing key Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

current song from the beginning.

If the key is pressed again within 1 second, the previous song is played.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playing key Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

next song. Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Fast forwards the song.

Scan While song (file) is playing key Shortly pressing the key : Scans all

songs from the next song for 10 sec- onds each.

Press the key again to turn off. The SCAN function is not supported in

iPod mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB Mode While file is playing (Folder Up) key Searches the next folder. While file is playing (Folder Down) key Searches the parent folder. If a folder is selected by pressing the

TUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.

Searching Songs (File) Turning TUNE knob : Searches for

songs (files) Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-

ed song (file).

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

2 RDM

4 127

Features of your vehicle

MENU : Audio CD Press the CD MP3 mode key to set the Repeat, Random, Information features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song. Press RPT again to turn off.

Random Press the key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within the current folder. Press RDM again to turn off.

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USB Press the CD MP3 mode key to set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All Random, Information, and Copy features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song. Press RPT again to turn off.

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

MENU

3 MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

Features of your vehicle

1284

Folder Random Press the key Set [ F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within the current folder. Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat Press the key Set [ F.RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat songs within the current folder. Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random Press the key Set [ A.RDM] through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play all songs within the CD. Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

Copy Press the key Set [ Copy] through the TUNE knob or key. This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

If another key is pressed while copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

If another media is connected or inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is can- celed.

Music will not be played while copying is in progress.

MENU : iPod

In iPod mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random, Information and Search features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song. Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random Press the key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or key. Plays all songs within the currently play- ing category in random order. Press RDM again to turn off.

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU 6

MENU

MENU

5 MENU

4 MENU

3 MENU

2 RDM

MENU

4 129

Features of your vehicle

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key. Displays information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

Search Press the key Set [ Search] through the TUNE knob or key. Displays iPod category list. Searching iPod category is

key pressed, move to parent category. MENU

4 MENU

MENU

3 MENU

Features of your vehicle

1304

MENU : My Music Mode (if equipped)

In My Music mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random, Information, Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key. Repeats the currently playing song. Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random Press the key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or key. Plays all songs in random order. Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key. Displays information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

Delete Press the key Set [ Delete] through the TUNE knob or key. Deletes currently playing file

In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. Deletes file from list

Select the file you wish to delete by using the TUNE knob.

Press the key and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All Press the key Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE knob or key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection Press the key Set [ Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob or key. Songs within My Music are selected and deleted. Select the songs you wish to delete

from the list.

After selecting, press the key and select the delete menu.

6 MENU

5 MENU

MENU

4 MENU

MENU

3 MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 131

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE - USING THE MY MUSIC

Even if memory is available, a maxi- mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.

The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.

Memory info can be checked in the System menu of Setup.

AUX AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur- rently connected with the AUX terminal. AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal. If an external device is connected, you can also press the key to change to AUX mode.

AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

NOTICE - USING THE AUX Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1324

Bluetooth Wireless Technology AUDIO (if equipped model)

What is Bluetooth Wireless Technology? Bluetooth Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices, stereo head- sets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio features Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio

may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your Bluetooth

Wireless Technology mobile phone. In order to use Bluetooth Wireless

Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phone.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the [Audio Streaming] of Phone is turned .

Setting Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Streaming : Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Audio Streaming] through the TUNE knob Set /

Starting Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Press the key to change the

mode in order of CDUSBAUXMy MusicBT Audio.

If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio will start playing.

Audio may not automatically start play- ing in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio features Play / Stop Press the TUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

The play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

MEDIA

OffOn

SETUP CLOCK

On

4 133

Features of your vehicle

PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone features

In order to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phone.

If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.

If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the first Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone connec- tion, set the Bluetooth Wireless Technology power to OFF.

PHONE (if equipped model)

Making a call using the Steering wheel mount controls

The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1) button : Activates voice recognition.

2) button : Places and transfers calls. 3) button : Ends calls or cancels func-

tions.

Check call history and making call Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con- troller.

The call history list will be displayed on the screen.

Press the key again to connect a call to the selected number.

Redialing the most recently called number Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con- troller.

The most recently called number is redialed.

If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call histo- ry is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones)

Features of your vehicle

1344

Bluetooth Wireless Technology (if equipped model)

Pairing a Bluetooth Wireless Technology Device

What is Bluetooth Wireless Technology Pairing? Pairing refers to the process of synchro- nizing your Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection. Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth Wireless Technology feature.

WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The drivers primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4 135

Features of your vehicle

Pairing Key / Key on the Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired 1. Press the key or the key

on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

2. Select [OK] button to enter the Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device

3. From your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

[Non SSP supported device] (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing) 4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played where the passkey is entered. Hear, enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device] 4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played 6 digits passkey . Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

PHONE

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1364

NOTICE

If Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are current- ly connected, pressing the key or the key on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select

TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section "When No Devices have been Paired" on the previous page.

NOTICE Bluetooth Wireless Technology fea-

tures supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device. - Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls - Operations during a call (Switch to

Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History - Downloading Mobile Contacts - Bluetooth Wireless Technology

device auto connection - Bluetooth Audio Streaming

Up to five Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

Only one Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.

Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected.

Only Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat- ed features are supported.

(Continued)

SETUP CLOCK

PHONE

4 137

Features of your vehicle

(Continued) Bluetooth related operations are pos- sible only within devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.

If a connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device becomes discon- nected due to being out of communi- cation range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, the sys- tem will be restored.

(Continued)

(Continued) After pairing is complete, a contacts

download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the con- nection. Refer to your phones users manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connec- tions.

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1)Connected Phone : Device that is cur- rently connected

2)Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and select [Connect].

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1384

Changing Priority

What is Priority? It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" fea- ture is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then select [Change Priority] but- ton from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

NOTICE Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

SETUP CLOCK

4 139

Features of your vehicle

Disconnecting a Device

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and select [Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and select [Delete] button.

NOTICE When deleting the currently connected

device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the delet- ing process.

If a paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is deleted, the devices call history and contacts data will also be deleted.

To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1404

USING Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus With a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device connected, press the key to display the Phone menu screen.

1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access

2)Call History : Device the call history list screen

3)Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen

4)Setup : Displays Phone related set- tings.

NOTICE If you select the [Call History] button

but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.

If you select the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.

This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more infor- mation on download support, refer to your mobile phone users manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call Answering a call with a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. To accept the call, press key on the steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1)Caller : Displays the other partys name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number

PHONE

4 141

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE When an incoming call pop-up is dis-

played, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.

The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.

When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will auto- matically revert to Private mode.

Favorites Press the key Select [Favorites]

1)Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection

2)To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.

NOTICE To save Favorite, contacts should be

downloaded. Contact saved in Favorites will not be

automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Favorite.

Call History

Press the key Select [Call History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed. Call history may not be saved in the call

history list in some mobile phones. Calls received with hidden caller ID will not

be saved in the call history list. Calling through the call history is not

possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone is not connected.

Up to 20 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.

Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not saved.

PHONE

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1424

Contacts

Press the key Select [Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed.

NOTE: Find a contact in an alphabetical order, press the key.

NOTICE Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car contacts. Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edit- ed or deleted on the phone.

Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is main- tained even if the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device has been discon- nected. (However, the contacts and call histo- ry saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)

It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.

When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

(Continued)

(Continued) It is not possible to begin downloading

a contact list when the contact down- load feature has been turned off with- in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.

The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of sup- ported Bluetooth devices and func- tion support, refer to your phones user manual.

MENU

PHONE

4 143

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Setting

Pairing a New Device Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system. For more information, refer to the Pairing through Phone Setup section within Bluetooth Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed. For more information, refer to the Setting Bluetooth Wireless Technology Connection section within Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currently select- ed phone to highest connection priori- ty

3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone

4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1444

NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- LOADING CONTACTS

Only contacts within connected phones can be downloaded. Also check to see that your mobile phone supports the download feature.

To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone users manual.

The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

NOTICE Upon downloading phone contacts,

the previous corresponding data is deleted.

This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.

Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgo- ing volume level.

NOTICE While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the key.SEEK

TRACK

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

4 145

Features of your vehicle

Turning Bluetooth System Off Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off] Once Bluetooth Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

NOTICE To turn Bluetooth Wireless Technology back on, go to [Phone] and select Yes.

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1464

VOICE RECOGNITION (if equipped model)

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition Shortly press the key on the steer- ing wheel. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the system will say Please say a command after the beep (BEEP) If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode,

then the system will only say (BEEP) To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to [System] [Prompt Feedback]

NOTICE For proper recognition, say the com- mand after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices 1)Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

Bob, Mom, Kim, etc.). Instead, always use full names (includ- ing first and last names) for all contacts (e.g., use Jacob Stevenson instead of Dad).

2)Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use Lieutenant instead of Lt. or Sergeant instead of Sgt.).

3)Do not use acronyms (i.e., use County Finance Department instead of CFD).

4)Do not use special characters (e.g., @, hyphen -, asterisk *, amper- sand &).

5)If a name is not recognized from the contact list, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use Grandpa Joseph instead of Pa Joe).

Skipping Prompt Messages While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the key on the steer- ing remote controller. The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the beep, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition While system waits for a command Shortly press the key on the steer- ing remote controller. The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will sound. After the beep, say the voice command.

SETUP CLOCK

4 147

Features of your vehicle

ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating Press and hold the key on the steer- ing remote controller.

NOTICE While using voice command, pressing

any steering wheel control or a differ- ent key will end voice command.

When the system is waiting for a voice command, say cancel or end to end voice command.

When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the key on the steering wheel to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone Contact Tips: The Hyundai Voice Recognition System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names. When using Voice Recognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation To maximize the use of Voice Recognition, consider these guide- lines when storing contacts: Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

Bob, Mom, etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for these contacts

Do not use special characters (e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)

Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use "Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name exactly as it is entered in the con- tacts list

Features of your vehicle

1484

Illustration on using voice commands

Starting voice command. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Skipping Voice Recognition Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

End voice command. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command after the beep or say "Help" for more information.

Please say a...

Contacts. Please say the name of the contact you want to call.

(BEEP)

(BEEP)

Beep Beep.. (end beep)Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)

Beep~

More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Music', or 'iPod'. Additionally, there are phone commands like "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep.

More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Music', or 'iPod'. Additionally, there are phone commands like "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep.

4 149

Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-

ing certain operations)

Command Function More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system. Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used within the current mode. Call Calls saved in Contacts

Ex) Call John Smith Call Calls to the number that is saved as

"Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

Call Calls to the number that is saved as "Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

Call Calls to the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

Call Calls to the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- mands. After saying this command, say Favorites,Call History, Contacts or Dial Number execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Display the Favorite screen. Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically con- nect the call.

Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.

Redial Connects the most recently called number. Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice

recognition and Bluetooth connections. When listening to the radio, displays the next

radio screen. (FM1FM2AMXM1

XM2XM3FM1) Radio When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played radio screen. When currently listening to the FM radio,

maintains the current state. When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played FM screen. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen. AM Displays the AM screen.

(Call by Name)

on Mobile

in Office

at Home

on Other

Features of your vehicle

1504

Command Function FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6. AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency. AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency. XM (Satellite) When currently listening to the XM, main-

tains the current state. When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played XM screen. XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected XM screen. XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.

CD Plays the music saved in the CD. USB Plays USB music. iPod Plays iPod music.

Command Function My Music Plays the music saved in My Music. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device. Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth

device. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment. Mute Mutes the sound. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

0~255

4 151

Features of your vehicle

FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during FM, AM radio operation

Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current

present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.(This feature can be used when receiving RBDS broadcasts.)

Command Function Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.

Features of your vehicle

1524

Audio CD commands: Commands available during Audio CD operation

MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order. Repeat Repeats the current track. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order. Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Command Function Random Randomly plays the files within the current

folder. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order. Repeat Repeats the current file. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order. Information Displays the information screen of the current

file. Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder

4 153

Features of your vehicle

iPod Commands: Commands available during iPod oper- ation

My Music Commands: Commands available during My Music operation

Command Function Random Randomly plays the songs within the current

category. Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-

tial order. Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Command Function Random Randomly plays all saved files. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order. Repeat Repeats the current file. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an

additional confirmation process.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Commands: Commands available during Bluetooth Wireless Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation

Command Function Play Plays the currently paused song. Pause Pauses the current song.

4 154

Features of your vehicle

4 155

Features of your vehicle

CD Player : AC180SBAN,AC180SBKN,AC1B0SBAN,AC1B0SBKN (Type B)

No logo will be shown if the Bluetooth Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

Features of your vehicle

1564

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit (for Bluetooth equipped model)

1. (EJECT) Ejects the disc.

2. Changes to FM, AM, SiriusXM mode. Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.

In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned . When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or keys ~ to select the desired mode.

3. Changes to CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode. Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned .When the pop up screen is displayed, use the TUNE knob or keys ~ to select the desired mode.

4. (for Bluetooth Wireless Technology equipped model)

Operates Phone Screen When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed

5. Radio Mode : Automatically searches

for broadcast frequencies. CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec- onds): Moves to next or previous song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec- onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.

BT Audio mode : Moves to next or pre- vious song(file)

The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone.

6. POWER/VOL knob Power : Turns power On/Off by

pressing the knob Volume : Sets volume by turning

the knob left/right

SEEK TRACK

PHONE

61

On

MEDIA

6 1

On

RADIO

4 157

Features of your vehicle

7. Each time the button is shortly pressed

(under 0.8 seconds), it sets the screen Off Screen On Screen Off

Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off state, press any key to turn the screen On again.

8. Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec- onds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Press the key again to contin- ue listening to the current frequency.

SiriusXM RADIO: does not support the Preset scan feature.

CD, USB, My Music mode - Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Previews each song (file) for 10 seconds each.

Press the key again to contin- ue listening to the current song (file).

9. Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes.

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec- onds): Moves to the Clock setting mode.

10. Displays menus for the current mode.

11. Radio Mode

- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search MP3 CD, USB modes : Folder Search

12. TUNE knob Radio mode : Changes frequency by

turning the knob left/right. CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right.

When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song.

Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

13. ~ (Preset) Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-

nels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)

CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode - : Repeat - : Random

In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected.

2 RDM

1 RPT

61

CAT FOLDER

MENU

SETUP CLOCK

SCAN

SCAN

61

SCAN

DISP

Features of your vehicle

1584

Audio Head Unit

14. Changes to FM mode. Each time the key is pressed, the

mode changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM.

15. Changes to XM mode.

SAT

FM/AM

4 159

Features of your vehicle

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display] Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up [Mode Pop up] Changes / selection mode During On state, press the or

key to display the mode change pop up screen.

Media Display When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from Folder/File or Album/Artist/Song.

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound] Select menu through TUNE knob

SETUP CLOCK

MEDIA RADIO

OffOn

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1604

Tone This menu allows you to set the Bass Middle, Treble. Select [Tone] Select menu through TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob left/right to set Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the

sound tone. Default : Restores default settings. Return : While adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Position This menu allows you to set the Bass, Middle, Treble and the Sound Fader and Balance. Select [Position] Select menu through

TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob left/right to set Fader, Balance :Selects the sound

fader and balance. Default : Restores default settings. Return : While adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control This feature is used to automatically con- trol the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle. Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in [On / Off] of TUNE knob

Voice Recognition Volume Adjusts voice recognition volume. Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set vol- ume of TUNE knob

4 161

Features of your vehicle

CLOCK SETTINGS

Press the key Select [Clock] through TUNE knob or key Select menu through TUNE knob

Clock Settings This menu is used to set the time. Select [Clock Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute].

Calendar Settings This menu is used to set the date (DD/MM/YYYY). Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the next setting. (Set in order of Day/Month/Year)

Time Format This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set /

through TUNE knob

: Displays time/date on screen : Turn off.Off

On

Off On

3

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1624

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select [System] Select menu through TUNE knob

Memory Information Displays currently used memory and total system memory. Select [Memory Information] OK The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side.

Prompt Feedback This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes. Select [Prompt Feedback] Set through

TUNE knob Normal(On) : This mode is for beginner

users and provides detailed instruc- tions during voice command operation.

Expert(Off) : This mode is for expert users and omits some information dur- ing voice command operation. (When using Expert mode, guidance instruc- tions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands.

Language This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language. Select [Language] Set through TUNE knob

The system will reboot after the lan- guage is changed.

Language support by region - English, Franais, Espaol

SETUP CLOCK

4 163

Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR SiriusXM

SEEK Press the key Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Changes the frequency. Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.

Preset SEEK Press the ~ key Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency saved in the corresponding key.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from ~ will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN Press the key Shortly pressing the key : The broad-

cast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. After scanning all frequencies, returns and plays the current broadcast fre- quency.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual search Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust the frequency.

61

SCAN

61

61

SEEK TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1644

MENU Within key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store Press the key Set [A.Store] through TUNE knob or key. Saves broadcasts with superior recep- tion to ~ keys. If no frequen- cies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

61

1 MENU

MENU

4 165

Features of your vehicle

SiriusXM Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels: Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3- month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. Youll get over 140 channels, including commercial-free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, enter- tainment, and a selection of premium pro- gramming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit sir- iusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539- 7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehi- cle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several fac- tors that can affect satellite radio reception performance: Antenna obstructions: For optimal

reception performance, keep the anten- na clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service: SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment program- ming to radio receivers, which are avail- able for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on person- al computer. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include: Hardware and an introductory trial sub-

scription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscrip- tion terms, contact SiriusXM at 1-888- 539-7474.

NOTE: SiriusXM services require a subscrip- tion sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-cur- rent rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1- 866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are avail- able only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limita- tions). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.sir- iusxm. ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trade- marks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

Features of your vehicle

1664

SiriusXM RADIO

Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio Your vehicle is equipped with a 3-month trial subscription to SiriusXM so you have access to over 140 channels of music, information, and entertainment program- ming.

Activation In order to extend or reactivate your Sirius Select subscription, you will need to contact SiriusXM Customer Care at 1- 800-643-2112. Have your 12-digit RID (Radio Identification Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial Number) ready. To retrieve the RID / ESN, turn on the radio, press the key, and tune to channel zero. Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation sig- nal.

SEEK Press the key Shortly pressing the key: select previ-

ous or next channel. Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): continuously move to previ- ous or next channel.

If the Category icon is displayed, channels are changed within the cur- rent category.

SCAN Press the key Shortly pressing the key: Previews

each broadcast for 5 seconds each Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the current frequency If the Category icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the cur- rent category.

Category Press the key Set through the TUNE knob

The display will indicate the category menus, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.

In the Category List Mode, press the key to navigate category

list. Press the tune knob to select the low-

est channel in the highlighted category. If channel is selected by selecting cat-

egory, then the CATEGORY icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

4 167

Features of your vehicle

Preset Press the ~ key Shortly pressing the key: Plays the fre-

quency saved in the corresponding key.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from ~ will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a BEEP.

Troubleshooting 1. Antenna Error If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Hyundai dealership. 2. No Signal If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncov- ered and has a clear view of the sky.

Tune Rotate TUNE knob : Changes the

channel number or scrolls category list. Press TUNE knob : Selects the

menu.

Menu Select category menu through the

TUNE knob Press the key Select [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key

Info (Information) Displays the Artist/Song info of the cur- rent song.

1

MENU

61

61

Features of your vehicle

1684

BASIC METHOD OF USE : AUDIO CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPOD / MY MUSIC

Press the key to change the mode in order of CDUSB(iPod)AUX My MusicBT Audio. The folder/file name is displayed on the screen.

The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted.

The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

Repeat While song (file) is playing (RPT) key Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode: RPT on screen To repeat one song (press the key :

Repeats the current song. MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen To repeat folder (pressing twice):

repeats all files within the current fold- er.

Press the key again to turn off repeat.

Random While song (file) is playing (RDM) key Audio CD, iPod, My Music mode: RDM on screen Random (press the key : Plays all

songs in random order.

2 RDM

1 RPT

1 RPT

MEDIA

4 169

Features of your vehicle

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen Folder Random (press the key : Plays

all files within the current folder in ran- dom order.

MP3 CD, USB mode : ALL RDM on screen All Random (pressing twice): Plays all

files in random order. Press the key again to turn off

repeat.

Changing Song/File While song (file) is playing key Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

current song from the beginning.

If the key is pressed again within 1 second, the previous song is played.

Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.

While song (file) is playing key Shortly pressing the key : Plays the

next song. Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds): Fast forwards the song.

Scan While song (file) is playing key Shortly pressing the key : Scans all

songs from the next song for 10 sec- onds each.

Press the key again to turn off. The SCAN function is not supported in

iPod mode.

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB Mode While file is playing (Folder Up) key Searches the next folder. While file is playing (Folder Down) key Searches the parent folder. If a folder is selected by pressing the

TUNE knob, the first file within the selected folder will be played.

Searching Songs (File) Turning TUNE knob : Searches for

songs (files) Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-

ed song (file)

CAT FOLDER

CAT FOLDER

SCAN

SCAN

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

2 RDM

Features of your vehicle

1704

MENU : Audio CD Press the Audio CD mode key to set the Repeat, Random, Information features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song. Press RPT again to turn off.

Random Press the key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within the current CD. Press RDM again to turn off.

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

MENU : MP3 CD / USB Press the MP3 CD/USB mode key to set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder Repeat, All Random, Information, and Copy features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song. Press RPT again to turn off.

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

MENU

3 MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

4 171

Features of your vehicle

Folder Random Press the key Set [ F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play songs within the current folder. Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat Press the key Set [ F.RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat songs within the current folder. Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random Press the key Set [ A.RDM] through the TUNE knob or key to randomly play all songs within the CD/USB. Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key to display information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

Copy Press the key Set [ Copy] through the TUNE knob or key. This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode.

If another key is pressed while copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed.

If another media is connected or inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is can- celed.

Music will not be played while copying is in progress.

MENU : iPod

In iPod mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random, Information and Search features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key to repeat the current song. Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random Press the key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or key. Plays all songs within the currently play- ing category in random order. Press RDM again to turn off.

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

6 MENU

MENU

5 MENU

4 MENU

3 MENU

2 RDM

MENU

Features of your vehicle

1724

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key. Displays information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

Search Press the key Set [ Search] through the TUNE knob or key. Displays iPod category list. Searching iPod category is

key pressed, move to parent category. MENU

4 MENU

MENU

3 MENU

4 173

Features of your vehicle

MENU : My Music Mode (if equipped)

In My Music mode, press the key to set the Repeat, Random, Information, Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection features.

Repeat Press the key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or key. Repeats the currently playing song. Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random Press the key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or key. Plays all songs in random order. Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information Press the key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or key. Displays information of the current song. Press the key to turn off info

display.

Delete Press the key Set [ Delete] through the TUNE knob or key. Deletes currently playing file

In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. Deletes file from list

Select the file you wish to delete by using the TUNE knob.

Press the key and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All Press the key Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE knob or key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection Press the key Set [ Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob or key. Songs within My Music are selected and deleted. Select the songs you wish to delete

from the list.

After selecting, press the key and select the delete menu.

6

MENU

5 MENU

MENU

4 MENU

MENU

3 MENU

2 RDM

MENU

1 RPT

MENU

MENU

Features of your vehicle

1744

NOTICE - USING THE MY MUSIC

Even if memory is available, a maxi- mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.

The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times.

Memory info can be checked in the System menu of Setup.

AUX AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur- rently connected with the AUX terminal. AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal. If an external device is connected, you can also press the key to change to AUX mode.

AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

NOTICE - USING THE AUX Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

MEDIA

4 175

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth Wireless Technology AUDIO (if equipped model)

What is Bluetooth Wireless Technology? Bluetooth Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including hands-free devices, stereo head- sets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

Before using Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio features Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio

may not be supported depending on the compatibility of your Bluetooth

Wireless Technology mobile phone. In order to use Bluetooth Wireless

Technology audio, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phone.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio can be used only when the [Audio Streaming] of Phone is turned .

Starting Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Press the key to change the

mode in order of CDUSBAUXMy MusicBT Audio.

If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio will start playing.

Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

Using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio features Play / Stop Press the TUNE knob to play and pause the current song.

The title / artist info may not be sup- ported in some mobile phone. When it is not supported, no title/no artist will be displayed.

Previous / Next song Press or to play previous or next song. The previous song / next song / play /

pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

SEEK TRACK

SEEK TRACK

MEDIA

On

Features of your vehicle

1764

PHONE

Before using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone features

In order to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone, you must first pair and connect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phone.

If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.

If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the first Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want automatic Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone connec- tion, set the Bluetooth Wireless Technology power to OFF.

PHONE (if equipped model)

Making a call using the Steering wheel mount controls

The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1) key : Activates voice recognition. 2) key : Places and transfers calls. 3) key : Ends calls or cancels func-

tions.

Check call history and making call - Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con- troller.

- The call history list will be displayed on the screen.

- Press the key again to connect a call to the selected number.

Redialing the most recently called number - Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con- troller.

- The most recently called number is redialed.

If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call histo- ry is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones

4 177

Features of your vehicle

WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The drivers primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology (if equipped model)

Pairing a Bluetooth Wireless Technology Device

What is Bluetooth Wireless Technology Pairing? Pairing refers to the process of synchro- nizing your Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone or device with the car audio system for connection. Pairing is necessary to connect and use the Bluetooth Wireless Technology feature.

Features of your vehicle

1784

Pairing key / key on the Steering Remote Controller

When No Devices have been Paired 1. Press the key or the key

on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.

2. Select [OK] button to enter the Pair Phone screen.

1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device

2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the device

3. From your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

[Non SSP supported device] (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing) 4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played where the passkey is entered. Hear, enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device with the car audio system.

[SSP supported device] 4. After a few moments, a screen is dis-

played 6 digits passkey . Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

PHONE

PHONE

4 179

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE

If Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are current- ly connected, pressing the key or the key on the steering wheel dis- plays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Select TUNE knob

1. The following steps are the same as those described in the section "When No Devices have been Paired" on the previous page.

NOTICE Bluetooth Wireless Technology fea-

tures supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device. - Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls - Operations during a call (Switch to

Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC on/off)

- Downloading Call History - Downloading Mobile Contacts - Bluetooth Wireless Technology

device auto connection - Bluetooth Audio Streaming

Up to five Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices can be paired to the Car Handsfree system.

Only one Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be connected at a time.

Other devices cannot be paired while a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected.

Only Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat- ed features are supported.

(Continued)

SETUP CLOCK

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1804

(Continued) Bluetooth related operations are pos- sible only within devices that support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth Wireless Technology mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio device.

If a connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device becomes discon- nected due to being out of communi- cation range, turning the device OFF, or a Bluetooth Wireless Technology communication error, corresponding Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.

If the system becomes unstable due to communication errors between the car Handsfree and the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, reset the device by turning off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, the sys- tem will be restored.

(Continued)

(Continued) After pairing is complete, a contacts

download request is sent once to the mobile phone. Some mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the con- nection. Refer to your phones users manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connec- tions.

Connecting a Device

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

1)Connected Phone : Device that is cur- rently connected

2)Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and select [Connect].

SETUP CLOCK

4 181

Features of your vehicle

Changing Priority

What is Priority? It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" fea- ture is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the highest priority, then select [Change Priority] but- ton from the Menu. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority.

NOTICE Priority icon will be displayed when the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1824

Disconnecting a Device

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and select [Disconnect] button.

Deleting a Device

Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and select [Delete] button.

NOTICE When deleting the currently connect-

ed device, the device will automatical- ly be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.

If a paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is deleted, the devices call history and contacts data will also be deleted.

To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

4 183

Features of your vehicle

USING Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Phone Menu Screen

Phone Menus With a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device connected, press the key to display the Phone menu screen.

1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access

2)Call History : Device the call history list screen

3)Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen

4)Setup : Displays Phone related set- tings.

NOTICE If you select the [Call History] button

but there is no call history data, a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data.

If you select the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stored, a prompt is displayed which asks to download contacts data.

This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more infor- mation on download support, refer to your mobile phone users manual.

Answering Calls

Answering a Call Answering a call with a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. To accept the call, press key on the steering wheel while the call is incoming.

1)Caller : Displays the other partys name when the incoming caller is saved with- in your contacts

2)Incoming Number : Displays the incoming number

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1844

NOTICE When an incoming call pop-up is dis-

played, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate.

The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones.

Favorites Press the key Select [Favorites]

1)Saved favorite contact : Connects call upon selection

2)To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.

NOTICE To save Favorite, contacts should be

downloaded. Contact saved in Favorites will not be

automatically updated if the contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Favorite.

Call History

Press the key Select [Call History]

A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed. Call history may not be saved in the call

history list in some mobile phones. Calls received with hidden caller ID will

not be saved in the call history list. Calling through the call history is not

possible when there is no call history stored or a Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone is not connected.

Up to 20 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History.

Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not saved.

PHONE

PHONE

4 185

Features of your vehicle

Contacts

Press the key Select [Contacts]

The list of saved phone book entries is displayed.

NOTE: Find a contact in an alphabetical order, press the key.

NOTICE Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone can be downloaded into the car con- tacts. Contacts that have been down- loaded to the car cannot be edited or deleted on the phone.

Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded data is main- tained even if the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device has been discon- nected. (However, the contacts and call histo- ry saved to the phone will be deleted if a paired phone is deleted.)

It is possible to download contacts during Bluetooth streaming audio.

When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

(Continued)

(Continued) It is not possible to begin downloading

a contact list when the contact down- load feature has been turned off with- in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device. In addition, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur, check the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device settings or the screen state.

The contacts download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. For more information of sup- ported Bluetooth devices and func- tion support, refer to your phones user manual.

MENU

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1864

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Setting

Pairing a New Device Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system. For more information, refer to the Pairing through Phone Setup section within Bluetooth Wireless Technology.

Viewing Paired Phone List Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed. For more information, refer to the Setting Bluetooth Wireless Technology Connection section within Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Connect/ disconnects currently selected phone

2) Change Priority : Sets currently select- ed phone to highest connection priori- ty

3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone

4) Return : Moves to the previous screen

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

4 187

Features of your vehicle

NOTICE BEFORE DOWN- LOADING CONTACTS

Only contacts within connected phones can be downloaded. Also check to see that your mobile phone supports the download feature.

To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone users manual.

The contacts for only the connected phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, a download progress bar is displayed.

NOTICE Upon downloading phone contacts,

the previous corresponding data is deleted.

This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.

Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

Outgoing Volume Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

Use TUNE knob to adjust the outgo- ing volume level.

NOTICE While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the key.SEEK

TRACK

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1884

Turning Bluetooth System Off Press the key Select [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off] Once Bluetooth Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

NOTICE To turn Bluetooth Wireless Technology back on, go to [Phone] and select Yes.

SETUP CLOCK

SETUP CLOCK

4 189

Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION (if equipped model)

Using Voice Recognition

Starting Voice Recognition Shortly press the key on the steer- ing wheel. Say a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then the system will say Please say a command after the beep (BEEP) If prompt feedback is in [OFF] mode,

then the system will only say (BEEP) To change Prompt Feedback

[On]/[Off], go to [System] [Prompt Feedback]

NOTICE For proper recognition, say the com- mand after the voice instruction and beep tone.

Contact List Best Practices 1)Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

Bob, Mom, Kim, etc.). Instead, always use full names (includ- ing first and last names) for all contacts (e.g., use Jacob Stevenson instead of Dad).

2)Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use Lieutenant instead of Lt. or Sergeant instead of Sgt.).

3)Do not use acronyms (i.e., use County Finance Department instead of CFD).

4)Do not use special characters (e.g., @, hyphen -, asterisk *, amper- sand &).

5)If a name is not recognized from the contact list, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use Grandpa Joseph instead of Pa Joe).

Skipping Prompt Messages While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the key on the steer- ing remote controller. The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. After the beep, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition While system waits for a command Shortly press the key on the steer- ing remote controller. The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will sound. After the beep, say the voice command.

SETUP CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1904

ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION

While Voice Recognition is operating Press and hold the key on the steer- ing remote controller.

NOTICE While using voice command, pressing

any steering wheel control or a differ- ent key will end voice command.

When the system is waiting for a voice command, say cancel or end to end voice command.

When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the key on the steering wheel to end voice command.

Voice Recognition and Phone Contact Tips: The Hyundai Voice Recognition System may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names. When using Voice Recognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation To maximize the use of Voice Recognition, consider these guide- lines when storing contacts: Do not store single-name entries (e.g.,

Bob, Mom, etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for these contacts

Do not use special characters (e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)

Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use "Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name exactly as it is entered in the con- tacts list

4 191

Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands

Starting voice command. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Skipping Voice Recognition Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Ending voice command. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):

while guidance message is being stated

More Help

Contacts

Cancel

More Help

Please say a command after the beep or say Help for more information.

Please say a...

Please say the contact name you want to call.

(BEEP)

Beep~

More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like FM, AM, or Satellite. You can also say a media source like USB, My Music, or iPod. Additionally, there are phone commands like Contacts, Call History, or Dial Number. You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep.

More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like FM, AM, or Satellite. You can also say a media source like USB, My Music, or iPod. Additionally, there are phone commands like Contacts, Call History, or Dial Number. You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep.

(BEEP)

Features of your vehicle

1924

Voice Command List Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available dur-

ing certain operations)

Command Function More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used anywhere in the system. Help Provides guidance on commands that can be

used within the current mode. Call Calls saved in Contacts

Ex) Call John Smith Call Calls to the number that is saved as

"Mobile" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile

Call Calls to the number that is saved as "Office" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office

Call Calls to the number that is saved as "Home" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home

Call Calls to the number that is saved as "Other" in Contacts Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other

Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- mands. After saying this command, say Favorites,Call History, Contacts or Dial Number execute corresponding functions.

Favorites Displays the Favorite screen. Call History Displays the Call History screen.

Command Function Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying

this command, say the name of a contact saved in the Contacts to automatically con- nect the call.

Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call.

Redial Connects the last dialed call number. Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice

recognition and Bluetooth connections. Radio When listening to the radio, displays the next

radio screen. (FM1FM2AMXM1

XM2XM3FM1) When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played radio screen. When currently listening to the FM radio,

maintains the current state. When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played FM screen. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen. AM Displays the AM screen.

(Call by Name)

on Mobile

in Office

at Home

on Other

4 193

Features of your vehicle

Command Function FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast

saved in FM Preset 1~6. AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency. AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding

frequency. XM (Satellite) When currently listening to the SiriusXM,

maintains the current state. When listening to a different mode, displays

the most recently played SiriusXM screen. XM (Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected SiriusXM screen. XM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM channel.

Media Moves to the most recently played media screen.

CD Plays the music saved in the CD. USB Plays USB music. iPod Plays iPod music.

Command Function My Music Plays the music saved in My Music. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device. Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth

device. Mute Mutes the sound. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.

0~223

Features of your vehicle

1944

FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during FM, AM radio operation

Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current

present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.(This feature can be used when receiving RBDS broadcasts.)

Command Function Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel. Scan Scans receivable channels from the current

broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. Information Displays the information of the current broad-

cast.

4 195

Features of your vehicle

Audio CD commands: Commands available during Audio CD operation

MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available during USB and MP3 CD operation

Command Function Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order. Repeat Repeats the current track. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-

tial order. Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.

Command Function Random Randomly plays the files within the current

folder. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order. Repeat Repeats the current file. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order. Information Displays the information screen of the current

file. Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder

Features of your vehicle

1964

iPod Commands: Commands available during iPod oper- ation

My Music Commands: Commands available during My Music operation

Command Function Random Randomly plays the songs within the current

category. Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-

tial order. Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-

tial order.

Command Function Random Randomly plays all saved files. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential

order. Repeat Repeats the current file. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential

order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an

additional confirmation process.

4 197

Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio Commands: Commands available during Bluetooth Wireless Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation

Command Function Play Plays the currently paused song. Pause Pauses the current song.

iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod

mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Hyundai is under license. SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1- 866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Android is a trade- mark of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

5

Before driving / 5-3

Key / 5-5

Manual transaxle /5-7

Automatic transaxle / 5-10

Brake system / 5-16

Cruise control system / 5-28

Active ECO system / 5-32

Economical operation / 5-33

Special driving conditions / 5-35

Winter driving / 5-39

Vehicle load limit / 5-43

Vehicle weight / 5-48

Trailer towing / 5-49

Driving your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

25

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS! Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win- dows immediately.

Do not inhale exhaust fumes. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia- tion.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary: 1. Close all windows. 2. Open side vents. 3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

5 3

Driving your vehicle

Before entering vehicle Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean. Check the condition of the tires. Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks. Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in sec- tion 7, Maintenance.

BEFORE DRIVING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI- TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehi- cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control, that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The dri- vers primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehi- cle systems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during oper- ation of the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

45

Before starting Close and lock all doors. Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached. Adjust the inside rearview mirror and

side view mirrors. Be sure that all lights work. Check all gauges. Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil- iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk. You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, dont drive. Do not ride with a driv- er who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a cab.

WARNING When you intend to park or stop

the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accel- erator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.

When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Keep all things in the vehicle safely stored.

If you do not focus on driving, it may cause an accident. Be care- ful when operating items that may distract from such as audio or heater controls. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive safely with full atten- tion to the task of driving.

WARNING All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is mov- ing. Refer to "Seat belts" in section 3 for more information on their proper use.

5 5

Driving your vehicle

Ignition switch position LOCK The steering wheel locks to protect against theft (if equipped). The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory) The steering wheel is unlocked (if equipped) and electrical accessories are operative.

NOTICE If difficulty is experienced in turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

ON The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started. To prevent discharge of the battery, do not leave ignition switch on for long time while engine is not running.

START Turn the ignition switch to the START posi- tion to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position.The brake warn- ing lamp can be checked in this position.

KEY

ORBC050001

WARNING - Ignition switch

Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

Before leaving the drivers seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manu- al transaxle or P (Park) for auto- matic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these pre- cautions are not taken.

Never reach for the ignition switch, or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.The pres- ence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death.

Do not place any movable objects around the drivers seat as they may move while driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.

Driving your vehicle

65

CAUTION If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- tion. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START posi- tion in an attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

Starting the engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed while turning the ignition switch to the start position. The starter will not oper- ate if the clutch pedal is not fully depressed. Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully. You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

It should be started without depressing the accelerator. 4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up

while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)

WARNING Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, slip- pers, ski boots, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake, accelerator pedal, and clutch (if equipped).

5 7

Driving your vehicle

Manual transaxle operation The manual transaxle has 6 forward gears. This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accom- plished. To shift gears, press the clutch pedal down fully, select the desired gear with the gearshift lever, and release the clutch pedal slowly. If your vehicle is equipped with an igni- tion lock switch, the engine will not start when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. The shift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse). The button (1) located at the bottom front of the shift knob must be pressed and held in while moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse). Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB051001N

The shift lever can be moved into any of the forward gears without pressing the button (1).

You should press the button (1) when moving the shift lever into reverse.

CAUTION When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inadver- tently press the shift lever side- ways in such a manner that the second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such over- revving of the engine and transaxle may possibly cause engine damage.

Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such downshifting may damage the engine, clutch and the transaxle.

Driving your vehicle

85

During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant is warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.

If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse), leave the shift lever in the neutral posi- tion and release the clutch. Depress the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutch The clutch should be depressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unneces- sary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

Downshifting It is important to downshift when you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up or down steep hills. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.

WARNING Before leaving the drivers seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R (Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.CAUTION

To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.

Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

When operating the clutch pedal, press the clutch pedal down fully. If you don't press the clutch pedal fully, the clutch may be damaged or noise may occur.

5 9

Driving your vehicle

Good driving practices Never take the vehicle out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremely haz- ardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear.

Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunc- tion. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.

Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.

Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better con- trol of your vehicle.

Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse).The transaxle can be dam- aged if you do not.

Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi- cantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

Avoid high speeds when corner- ing or turning.

Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over- steers to reenter the roadway.

In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

Never exceed posted speed limits.

Driving your vehicle

105

Automatic transaxle operation The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The indi- vidual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever. To move the shift lever from the P (Park) position, the brake pedal must be depressed.

NOTICE The first few shifts on a new vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a nor- mal condition and the shift quality will adjust after several shifts are completed and learned by the PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

ORB050004

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Depress the brake pedal when shifting

The shift lever can be moved freely

5 11

Driving your vehicle

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

Transaxle ranges The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatic transaxle

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for peo- ple, especially children, before shifting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

Before leaving the drivers seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order iden- tified.

CAUTION To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any for- ward gear position with the brakes on.

When stopped on an incline, do not hold the vehicle stationary with engine power. Use the serv- ice brake or the parking brake.

Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.

WARNING Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P (Park) position and set the parking brake fully.

Never leave a child unattended in a vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

125

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi- tion. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator pedal, at which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the lower gear.

NOTICE Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D (Drive).

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, Manual shift mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate.To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In Manual shift mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts. Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear. Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

CAUTION Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); except as explained in Rocking the vehicle in this sec- tion.

ORB050008

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Manual shift mode

CAUTION The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

5 13

Driving your vehicle

NOTICE In Manual shift mode, the driver must

execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.

In Manual shift mode, only the 6 for- ward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.

In Manual shift mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.

In Manual shift mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone, the transaxle will upshift automatical- ly.

To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is oper- ated.

When driving on a slippery road, move the shift lever to the Manual shift mode and push the shift lever forward into the + (up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the next upper gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the - (down) side to shift back to the next lower gear.

Shift lock system For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed. To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse): 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. (if equipped) 3. Move the shift lever.

Shift-lock override (if equipped)

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following: 1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

shift-lock override access hole. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the access

hole and press down on the screwdriv- er.

3. Move the shift lever. 4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi- ately.

WARNING Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into anoth- er position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle which could injure persons in or around the car.

ORB054041N

Driving your vehicle

145

Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. Even if the ignition switch is in the LOCK position, the key also cannot be removed.

Good driving practices Never move the gear shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi- tion with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Never move the gear shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when moving.

Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunc- tion. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down, shift into Manual shift mode and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car.

Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.

Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the car from moving.

Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.

Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelera- tor pedal.

5 15

Driving your vehicle

Moving up a steep grade from a stand- ing start To move up a steep grade from a stand- ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes.

WARNING Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi- cantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

Avoid high speeds when corner- ing or turning.

Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over- steers to reenter the roadway.

In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

Never exceed posted speed lim- its.

WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. Do not rev up the engine. This may cause engine over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.

Driving your vehicle

165

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage. In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you nor- mally would. The stopping distance, how- ever, will be longer. When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted. Pump the brake pedal only when neces- sary to maintain steering control on slip- pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake tem- peratures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

(Continued)

(Continued) When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous brake applica- tion will cause the brakes to over- heat and could result in a tempo- rary loss of braking performance.

Wet brakes may impair the vehi- cles ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

Always, confirm the position of the brake and accelerator pedal before driving. If you do not check the position of the acceler- ator and brake pedal before driv- ing, you may depress the acceler- ator instead of the brake pedal. It may cause a serious accident.

WARNING - Parking brake Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in apply- ing the brake.

5 17

Driving your vehicle

Disc brakes wear indicator (if equipped) Your vehicle has disc brakes. When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high- pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal. Please remember that some driving con- ditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes.This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

Rear drum brakes (if equipped) Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators.Therefore, have the rear brake linings inspected if you hear a rear brake rubbing noise. Also have your rear brakes inspected each time you change or rotate your tires and when you have the front brakes replaced.

Parking brake Applying the parking brake To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then pull up the park- ing brake lever as far as possible without pressing the release button. In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift lever should be in the appropriate low gear on manual transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) position on automatic transaxle vehicles.WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound means your vehicle needs service. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.

ORB050003

Driving your vehicle

185

Releasing the parking brake To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly press the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) while holding the button. If the parking brake does not release or does not release all the way, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ORB050002

CAUTION Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the vehicle system and make hazardous driving or lead to an accident.

WARNING To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving the vehicle, do not use the gearshift lever in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake AND make sure the gearshift lever is securely posi- tioned in 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle equipped vehicles and in P (Park) for automatic transaxle equipped vehicles.

Never allow anyone who is unfa- miliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadver- tent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

5 19

Driving your vehicle

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the igni- tion switch in the START or ON position. Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a mal- function in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary. If at all possible, cease driving the vehi- cle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe loca- tion or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu- lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels. When you apply your brakes under con- ditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active. In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situa- tion, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situa- tion warrants and allow the ABS to con- trol the force being delivered to the brakes.

WARNING ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci- dents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should be reduced if the road condi- tion calls for it, not just in "extreme" road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system (or Electronic Stability Control system) may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions. During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds: Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads. With tire chains installed. On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS (or ESC) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

W-75

Driving your vehicle

205

NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is start- ed. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot pre- vent accidents resulting from exces- sive speeds.

On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping dis- tance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

NOTICE When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning. Do not pump your brakes! Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, howev- er, your regular brakes will work normally.

The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road, and operate your brakes continu- ously, the ABS will be active con- tinuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and stop the engine.

Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a prob- lem with the ABS. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

5 21

Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability control (ESC) The Electronic Stability control (ESC) system is designed to help stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes in the engine manage- ment system to help stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a sub- stitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in prevent- ing a loss of control. It is still your respon- sibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety. When you apply your brakes under con- ditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is start- ed. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic Stability Control System is functioning properly.

WARNING Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cor- nering. Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in seri- ous accidents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent acci- dents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always fol- low all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

ORB050009

Driving your vehicle

225

ESC operation ESC ON condition

When the ignition is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illumi- nate for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on.

Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indica- tor will illuminate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).

When starting the engine, you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator light blinks. When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indi- cates nothing unusual.

When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

State 1

Press the ESC OFF button shortly (ESC OFF indicator light and message illumi- nates). At this state, the engine control function does not operate. In other words, the traction control function does not operate but only the brake control function operates.

ORB045402L

5 23

Driving your vehicle

State 2

Press the ESC OFF button for more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator light and message illuminates and ESC OFF warning chime will sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function does not operate. In other words, the vehicle stability control function does not operate any more. If the ignition switch is placed to the LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

Indicator light When ignition switch is turned to ON, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the ESC system is operating normally. The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate. The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

ESC indicator light

ESC OFF indicator light

ORB045403L

CAUTION Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

WARNING The Electronic Stability Control sys- tem is only a driving aid; use pre- cautions for safe driving by slowing down on curved, snowy, or icy roads. Drive slowly and do not attempt to accelerate whenever the ESC indicator light is blinking, or when the road surface is slippery.

Driving your vehicle

245

ESC OFF usage When driving

ESC should remain on for daily driving whenever possible.

To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

NOTICE When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation.

Good braking practices

WARNING Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indica- tor light blinks). If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control and cause an accident.

WARNING Whenever you leave or park your

vehicle, always set the parking brake as far as possible and fully engage the vehicle's transaxle into the P (Park) position. If the parking brake is not fully engaged, the vehicle may move inadvertently and injure yourself and others.

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadver- tent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

5 25

Driving your vehicle

After parking the vehicle, check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.

Driving through water may get the brakes wet.They can also get wet when the car is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.Wet brakes may cause the car to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes light- ly until the braking action returns to nor- mal, taking care to keep the car under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

Do not coast down hills with the car out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driv- ing can be dangerous because it can result in the brakes overheating and los- ing their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the car pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slow- ly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

If your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic transaxle, do not let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping for- ward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

Use caution when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged posi- tion. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Do not hold the vehicle on the incline with the accelerator pedal pressed. This can cause the transaxle to over- heat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

Driving your vehicle

265

Vehicle stability management (VSM) (if equipped) This system provides further enhance- ments to vehicle stability and steering responses when the vehicle is driving on a slippery road or the vehicle detects a change in coefficient of friction between the left and right wheels.

VSM operation When the VSM is in operation, ESC indi- cator light ( ) blinks. When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal steering responses (EPS). This is only the effect of brake and EPS control and is a normal operating condition.

The VSM does not operate when:

Driving on a gradient or incline Driving in reverse ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains

on the instrument cluster EPS indicator light remains on the

instrument cluster

VSM operation off If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates. To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.

Malfunction indicator The VSM can be deactivated even if you dont cancel the VSM operation by press- ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has been detected some- where in the Electric Power Steering sys- tem or VSM system. If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light ( ) remains on, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

WARNING The Vehicle Stability Management

system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a sup- plementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving.

Your vehicle is designed to acti- vate according to the drivers intention, even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for driving at safe speeds for the conditions including driving inclement weather and on a slippery road.

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

5 27

Driving your vehicle

Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if equipped) Hill start Assist Control is a convenience function. The main intent is to help pre- vent the vehicle from rolling backwards while taking off uphill from a stop. HAC holds the braking pressure built up by the driver during stopping for 2 seconds after releasing the brake pedal. During the pressure-hold period, the driver has enough time to press the accelerator pedal to drive off. The braking pressure is reduced as soon as the system detects the driver's inten- tion to drive off.

NOTICE The HAC does not operate when the

transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

WARNING The HAC is usually activated only for 2 seconds: If the built-up brake hold pressure is insufficient to hold the vehicle, the driver must quickly activate the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward. Unexpectedly rolling backward could cause an accident, and seri- ous injury.

Driving your vehicle

285

CRUISE indicator SET indicator

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a con- stant speed without resting your foot on the accelerator pedal. This system is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

NOTICE During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will ener- gize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.

To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the ON position or starting the engine. This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in nor- mal condition.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be activat- ed unintentionally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently set- ting a speed.

Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

Do not use the cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system.

Be careful when driving downhill using the cruise control system, which may increase the vehicle speed.

ORB050018

CAUTION During cruise control operation of a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depress- ing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON- OFF switch.

5 29

Driving your vehicle

To set cruise control speed: 1. Push the cruise ON-OFF button on the

steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Move the toggle switch down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instru- ment cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control set speed: Follow either of these procedures: Move the toggle switch up (to RES+)

and hold it.Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

Move the toggle switch up (to RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

ORB051033N ORB051032NORB051030N

Driving your vehicle

305

To decrease the cruising speed: Follow either of these procedures: Move the toggle switch down (to SET-)

and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.

Move the toggle switch down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruis- ing speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following: Press the brake pedal. Press the clutch pedal with a manual

transaxle. Shift the shift lever into N (Neutral) with

an automatic transaxle Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel. Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h). Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

ORB051031NORB051033N

5 31

Driving your vehicle

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move the toggle switch up (to RES+). You will return to your previously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h): If any method other than the ON-OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the toggle switch up (to RES+).

NOTICE Always check the road conditions when you move the toggle switch up (to RES+) to resume the speed.

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following: Push the cruise ON/OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru- ment cluster will go off).

Turn the ignition off. Both of these actions cancel cruise con- trol operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in To set cruise control speed on the previous page.

ORB051032N ORB051030N

Driving your vehicle

325

Active ECO operation Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling the engine and transaxle. But fuel-efficiency can be changed by the driver's driving habits and road conditions. When the Active ECO button is

pressed the ECO indicator (green) will illuminate to show that the Active ECO is operating.

When the Active ECO is activated, it does not turn off even though the engine is restarted again. To turn off the system, press the active ECO but- ton again.

If Active ECO is turned off, it will return to the normal mode.

Limitation of Active ECO operation: If the following conditions occur while Active ECO is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator. When the coolant temperature is low:

The system will be limited until engine temperature becomes normal.

When driving up a hill: The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is required.

When using Sport Mode: The system will be limited according to the manually selected gear.

When the accelerator pedal is deeply pressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited, judging that the driver desires additional accelera- tion.

ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB050017

5 33

Driving your vehicle

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive. Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal- lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the fol- lowing driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs: Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unneces- sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe dis- tance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especial- ly on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consump- tion.

Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot rest- ing on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.

Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.

Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align- ment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).

Keep your car clean. For maximum serv- ice, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.

Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel economy.

Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Driving your vehicle

345

Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac- ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid- ed by shifting at the recommended speeds.

Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operat- ed by engine power so your fuel econ- omy is reduced when you use it.

Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.

Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con- dition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur- ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine run- ning. Instead, keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering which could cause serious injury or death.

5 35

Driving your vehicle

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions: Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking. Avoid sudden braking or steering.

If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.

Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible dam- age to the transaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

1JBB3302

WARNING - ABS Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting Downshifting with an automatic transaxle, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an accident. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slip- pery surfaces.

CAUTION Prolonged rocking may cause engine over-heating, transaxle dam- age or failure, and tire damage.

Driving your vehicle

365

NOTICE The ESC system should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- ners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember: Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tires Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 35 mph (56 km/h). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is station- ary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage that may injure bystanders.

OBH058035L OMC035004

WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects.

5 37

Driving your vehicle

Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.

Keep your headlights clean and prop- erly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more diffi- cult to see at night.

Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to read- just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if youre not pre- pared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain: A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

Keep your windshield wiping equip- ment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.

Turn on your headlights to make it eas- ier for others to see you.

Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking oper- ation returns.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no high- er than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected. After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.

Driving your vehicle

385

Highway driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire fail- ure.

NOTICE Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine. Inspect your drive belt for proper tension, or have your Hyundai dealer inspect this at the normal service intervals listed in section 7.

WARNING Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sud- den tire failure leading to acci- dents, injuries, and even death. Always check tires for proper inflation before driving. For prop- er tire pressures, refer to Tires and wheels in section 8.

Driving on tires with no or insuffi- cient tread is dangerous. Worn- out tires can result in loss of vehicle control, collisions, injury, and even death. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible and should never be used for driving. Always check the tire tread before driving your car. For further information and tread limits, refer to Tires and wheels in section 7.

OMG015008

5 39

Driving your vehicle

More severe weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other prob- lems. To minimize winter driving problem, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and han- dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli- cations, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli- cations on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep suffi- cient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

NOTICE Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before fitting tire chains.

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicles handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehi- cle's original equipment tires. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for max- imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regu- lations for possible restrictions against their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire size Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's stan- dard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

1JBB3305

Driving your vehicle

405

Tire chains Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mount- ing some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec- ommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use gen- uine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after going over the instruction. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty. When using tire chains, install them on the front tires only.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu- facturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

CAUTION Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufac- turer warranty. Also, the snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class S certified.

Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.

WARNING - Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if avail- able. Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.

1JBA4068

5 41

Driving your vehicle

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubri- cates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the bat- tery and cables as described in section 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and compo- nents to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

WARNING - Tire chains The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling. Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturers rec- ommended speed limit, whichev- er is lower.

Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked- wheel braking.

CAUTION Chains that are the wrong size or

improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, sus- pension, body and wheels.

Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

425

To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the con- tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk of the parking brake may freezing, apply it only tem- porarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumu- late underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and inter- fere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the move- ment of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment Depending on the severity of the weath- er where you drive your car, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Don't place foreign objects or materials in the engine compart- ment Placement of foreign objects or materials which prevent cooling of the engine, in the engine compartment, may cause a failure or combustion. The manufacturer is not responsible for the damage caused by such placement.

5 43

Driving your vehicle

Tire and loading information label The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight: 849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- mum combined weight of occupants and cargo.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

ORB054040N

ORB054041A

Type A

Type B

ORB054042N

ORB054043N

Type C

Type D

Driving your vehicle

445

Seating capacity: Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity: We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity: The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit - 1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail- er, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTICE We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

5 45

Driving your vehicle

C190F03JM

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg) Subtract Occupant

B Weight 815 lbs

163 lbs (74 kg) 5 (370 kg)

C Available Cargo and 34 lbs

Luggage weight (15 kg)

A B C

Example 3

Refer to your vehicles tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg) Subtract Occupant

B Weight 300 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) 2 (136 kg)

C Available Cargo and 549 lbs

Luggage weight (249 kg)

Example 1

A B C

C190F02JM

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs

Weight (385 kg) Subtract Occupant

B Weight 750 lbs

150 lbs (68 kg) 5 (340 kg)

C Available Cargo and 99 lbs

Luggage weight (45 kg)

A B C

Example 2

Driving your vehicle

465

Certification label The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pillar. This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. This label also tells you the maxi- mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center- line.

The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driv- er or a passenger.

OBH059070

WARNING - Over loading Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage.You can calculate the weight of your load by weigh- ing the items (or people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to over- load your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued) Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR, either the maximum front or rear GAWR and vehicle capacity weight. If you do, parts, including tires on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles and braking ability. This could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehi- cle.

5 47

Driving your vehicle

WARNING Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure that could lead to a crash.

Overloading your vehicle can cause increased stopping dis- tances that could lead to a crash.

A crash resulting from poor handling, vehicle damage, tire failure, or increased stopping distances could result in seri- ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargo Items you carry inside your vehicle can strike and injure occupants in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

Never stack items, like suit- cases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.

When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.

Do not drive with a seat folded down unless necessary.

CAUTION Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warran- ty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension com- ponents to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Driving your vehicle

485

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the certifica- tion label:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equip- ment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight) This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the certification label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer- tification label located on the drivers door sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

5 49

Driving your vehicle

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING

6

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-6

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7, 6-12

If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) / 6-17

If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) / 6-25

Towing / 6-32

What to do in an emergency

What to do in an emergency

26

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehi- cle is stopped near the edge of a road- way. Depress the flasher switch with the igni- tion switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehi- cle is being towed.

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehi- cle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving If a tire goes flat while you are driving: 1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the car slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of con- trol. When the car has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divid- ed highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

ORB040045

6 3

What to do in an emergency

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse (manual transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the car. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic.

4.When repairing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this sec- tion.

If engine stalls while driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly 1. If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer- gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If engine turns over normally but does not start 1. Check fuel level. 2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors at igni- tion coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.

3. If the engine still does not start, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNING If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be over- loaded and create a fire hazard.

What to do in an emergency

46

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting proce- dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom- mend that you have a competent techni- cian or towing service jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro- duces hydrogen gas which may explode if exposed to flame or sparks. If these instructions are not fol- lowed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile batteries contain sul- furic acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or explode.

WARNING - Battery Never attempt to check the elec- trolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

6 5

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is grounded connects to the vehicle body.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustra- tion. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2). Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not con- nect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con- tact anything except the correct bat- tery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehi- cle with the discharged battery. Operate the vehicle for at least 20 minutes of idle or driving before turn- ing it off otherwise the battery may not be recharged enough and vehicle cannot be started again. If you contin- ue to have starting problem you need to visit dealer for a battery check.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehi- cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Push-starting Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle should not be push-started because it might damage the emission control sys- tem. Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle cannot be push-started. Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cables Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative ter- minal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged bat- tery to overheat and crack, releas- ing battery acid.

WARNING Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

66

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates over- heating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this hap- pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air con- ditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air con- ditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine tem- perature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If over- heating happens again, call an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.WARNING

While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.

CAUTION Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

6 7

What to do in an emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (TYPE A)

Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the drivers responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pres- sure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminat- ed, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- cle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

ORB064010A

What to do in an emergency

86

NOTICE If the TPMS indicator does not illu- minate for 3 seconds when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON posi- tion or engine is running, or if it comes on after blinking for approxi- mately one minute, take your car to your nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

Low tire pressure telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicator is illuminat- ed and warning message displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering and anticipate increased stop- ping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pres- sure as indicated on the vehicles placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the drivers side center pil- lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale may flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recom- mended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunction- ing because the decreased tem- perature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

6 9

What to do in an emergency

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approxi- mately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an under infla- tion warning at the same time as sys- tem failure then it will illuminate the TPMS malfunction indicator. Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.

WARNING - Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on low pres- sure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

CAUTION The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around elec- tric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcast- ing stations, military installa- tions, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

The TPMS malfunction indica- tor may illuminate if snow chains or some separately purchased devices such as notebook computers, mobile charger, remote starter, navi- gation etc. are used in the vehicle.This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

What to do in an emergency

106

Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi- ble or replace the flat tire with the spare tire (if equipped).

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Even if you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will blink or remain on until the low pressure tire is repaired and placed on the vehicle. After you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi- nate after driving about 20 minutes because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated. Once the low pressure tire is reinflat- ed to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will extin- guish within a few minutes of driving. If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION If original mounted tire is replaced with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel should be deactivated by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still acti- vates, the tire pressure monitor- ing system may not operate properly. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire.The tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI may dam- age the tire pressure sensor. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel shall be elim- inated when you replace the tire with a new one.

6 11

What to do in an emergency

You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2.This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION Do not use any tire sealant except the Tire Mobility Kit approved by HYUNDAI if your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors.

WARNING - Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) com- ponents may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driv- er of low tire pressure condi- tions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) com- ponents may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam- age caused by external fac- tors such as nails or road debris.

If you feel any vehicle instabil- ity, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road. WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

What to do in an emergency

126

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (TYPE B)

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/ TPMS Malfunction Indicator

(2) Low Tire Pressure Position Telltale

Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminat- ed, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- cle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly.

ORB064010A

ORB045400L

6 13

What to do in an emergency

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE If any of the below happens, we rec- ommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. 1.The low tire pressure telltale/

TPMS malfunction indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or engine is running.

2.The TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

3.The Low tire pressure position telltale remains illuminated.

Low tire pressure telltale

Low tire pressure position telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicator is illuminat- ed and warning message displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The low tire pressure position telltale light will indicate which tire is significantly under-inflat- ed by illuminating the corresponding position light. If either telltale illuminates, immediate- ly reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering and anticipate increased stop- ping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pres- sure as indicated on the vehicles placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the drivers side center pil- lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will remain on and the TPMS Malfunction Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated (when the vehicle is driven approximately 20 minutes at speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h)) until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

NOTICE The spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure sensor (if equipped with a spare tire).

What to do in an emergency

146

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approxi- mately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.

NOTICE If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the low tire pressure position telltale will not be displayed even though the vehicle has an under- inflated tire.

WARNING - Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances. Continued driving on low pres- sure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

CAUTION In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recom- mended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunction- ing because the decreased tem- perature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

6 15

What to do in an emergency

Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure and Position telltales will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire (if equipped).

The spare tire (if equipped) does not come with a tire pressure monitoring sensor. When the low pressure tire or the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale will remain on.

Also, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is driven at speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20 minutes. Once the original tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sensor is reinflated to the recommended pres- sure and reinstalled on the vehicle, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go off within a few minutes. If the indicators do not extinguish after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem (except for the spare tire). You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serv- iced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate- ly 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the vehicle is moving around elec- tric power supply cables or radio transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcast- ing stations, military installa- tions, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

The TPMS malfunction indica- tor may blink for approximate- ly 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if the snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

CAUTION Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire.The tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI may dam- age the tire pressure sensor. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel shall be elim- inated when you replace the tire with a new one.

What to do in an emergency

166

You may not be able to identify a tire with low pressure by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING - Protecting TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) com- ponents may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driv- er of low tire pressure condi- tions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) com- ponents may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam- age caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

If you feel any vehicle instabil- ity, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.CAUTION

Do not use any tire sealant except the Tire Mobility Kit approved by HYUNDAI if your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sensors.

6 17

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)

Jack and tools The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment. Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment. (1) Jack (2) Jack handle (3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only. To prevent the jack from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly. Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

Always move the vehicle com- pletely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on level firm ground. If you cannot find a firm, level place off the road, call a tow- ing service company for assistance.

(Continued)

ORB060001

(Continued) Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi- tions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack causing serious injury or death. No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack; use vehicle support stands.

Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack.

Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Make sure any children pres- ent are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

What to do in an emergency

186

Removing and storing the spare tire Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise. Store the tire in the reverse order of removal. To prevent the spare tire and tools from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Changing tires 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly. 2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transaxle or P (Park) with automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash- er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.

ORBC060002 OBH068002L 1JBA6504

6 19

What to do in an emergency

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- terclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame.

WARNING - Changing a tire To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.

We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

ORBC060003

WARNING - Jack location To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle and in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

1JBA6025

What to do in an emergency

206

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 1.2 in (30 mm). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta- ble and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.

ORBC060004

CAUTION Place the jack so it does not damage the plastic guard. If you place the jack at the plastic guard and jack up the vehicle, the plas- tic guard may be damaged.

WARNING Wheels may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.

(Continued)

6 21

What to do in an emergency

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight.The nuts should be installed with their tapered small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fin- gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench han- dle. Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque: Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel: 65~79 lbft (9~11 kgm)

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recom- mended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the cor- rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

(Continued) Make sure the wheel makes good contact with the hub when installed. If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle, serious injury or death.

ORBC060005

What to do in an emergency

226

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Important - use of compact spare tire (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire, it will take up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only.

CAUTION Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced. Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

WARNING - Wheel studs If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel.This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate spare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to Tires and wheels sec- tion 8.

6 23

What to do in an emergency

The compact spare should be inflat- ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

NOTICE Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions: Under no circumstances should you

exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher speed could damage the tire.

Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.

Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible per- sonal injury.

Do not exceed the vehicles maxi- mum load rating or the load-carry- ing capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a con- ventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could result in damage to the vehicle.

Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the com- pact spare tire is installed.

Do not use tire chains on the com- pact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain.

Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

The compact spare tires tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn com- pact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car compo- nents may occur.

Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.

Do not tow a trailer while the com- pact spare tire is installed.

WARNING The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over 50 mph (80 km/h). The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as is possible to avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or death.

What to do in an emergency

246

Jack label 1. Model Name 2. Maximum allowable load 3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake. 4. When using the jack, stop the

engine. 5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack. 6. The designated locations under

the frame 7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transaxle or move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transaxle.

9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.

10. Jack manufacture 11. Production date 12. Representative company and

address

Type A

Example

Type B

OHYK065011

ORB065100

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

6 25

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use. (1) Compressor (2) Sealant bottle The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

Introduction With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture. The system of compressor and seal- ing compound effectively and com- fortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire. After you ensured that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cau- tiously on the tire (distance up to 120 miles (200 km) at a max. speed of 50mph (80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

OJC064010 OGDE064101

CAUTION - One sealant for one tire

When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire wall Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an acci- dent due to tire failure.

WARNING - Temporary fix Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.

What to do in an emergency

266

It is possible that some tires, espe- cially with larger punctures or dam- age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely. Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use. The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only. This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably. Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.

To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your park- ing brake.

Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobil- ity kit.

Do not use on motorcycles, bicy- cles or any other type of tires.

When the tire and wheel are dam- aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm). Please contact the nearest HYUNDAI dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pres- sure.

Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.

Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.

Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.

Do not leave the compressor run- ning for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -22F ( -30C).

6 27

What to do in an emergency

0. Speed restriction label 1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction 2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel 3. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle 5. Compressor 6. On/off switch 7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure 8. Button for reducing tire inflation

pressure

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit OGDE064102

WARNING - Expired sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant Keep out of reach of children. Avoid contact with eyes. Do not swallow.

What to do in an emergency

286

Using the TireMobilityKit Filling the sealant Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure. 1. Shake the sealant bottle.

2. Connect the filling hose (2) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that button (6) on the com- pressor is not pressed.

OGD065101K OGD065102KOGDE065100K

6 29

What to do in an emergency

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

6. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.

7. Connect between compressor and the vehicle power outlet using the cable and connectors (3).

8. With the ignition switched on: Switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 3 minutes to fill the sealant. The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant.

OGD065103KORB064013 ORB064015

What to do in an emergency

306

9. Switch off the compressor. 10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor- age location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approximately 4~6miles (7~10km or, about 10min) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road. Call for road side service or towing. When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be damaged by sealant, remove the sealant stained with tire pressure sensors and wheel and inspect in authorized dealer.

Checking the tire inflation pres- sure 1. After driving approximately 4 ~ 6

miles (7 ~ 10 km or about 10min), stop at a safe location.

2. Connect the filling hose (2) of the compressor (clip mounted side) directly and then connect the fill- ing hose (2) (opposite side) to the tire valve.

3. Connect between compressor and the vehicle power outlet using the cable and connectors.

4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recomended tire inflation. With the ignition swithched on, proceed as follows. - To increase the inflation pres-

sure : Switch on the compres- sor, position I. To check the cur- rent inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

CAUTION - Tire pressure Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 200kpa (29 PSI). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.

WARNING - Carbon monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle run- ning in a poorly ventilated area for extended periods of time. Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.

6 31

What to do in an emergency

NOTICE The pressure gauge may show high- er than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compres- sor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pres- sure: Press the button (8) on the compressor hose.

Technical Data System voltage: DC 12 V Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V Amperage rating: max. 10 A 1A Suitable for use at temperatures:

-22 ~ +158F (-30 ~ +70C) Max. working pressure:

6 bar (87 psi) Size Compressor: 6.3 x 5.9 x 2.2 in.

(161 x 150 x 55.8 mm) Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 3.1 in.

( 85 x 81 mm) Compressor weight:

1.62 lbs 0.06 lbs (735 g 25 g) Sealant volume:

12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

CAUTION - Tire pressure sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit including sealant not approved by HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sensors may be dam- aged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors in authorized dealer.

What to do in an emergency

326

TOWING

Towing service If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an author- ized Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow- ing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dol- lies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or suspen- sion components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lift- ed, not the rear.

OMC045012

dolly

A

B

C

CAUTION Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause dam- age to the vehicle.

HXD02

HXD03

6 33

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an emer- gency without wheel dollies : 1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion. 2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral). 3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (if equipped) 1. Open the trunk lid/tailgate, and remove

the towing hook from the tool case. 2. Remove the hole cover pressing the

lower part of the cover on the bumper. 3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Emergency towing (if equipped) If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an authorized Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truck service. If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporar- ily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook attached to the front (or under the rear) of the vehicle.

CAUTION Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter- nal damage to the transaxle.

ORB060007

ORBC060008

Front

Rear

ORB060006

What to do in an emergency

346

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis- tance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi- tions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.

The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequent- ly.

Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.

Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook. Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow- ing may damage the body of your vehicle.

Use only a cable or chain specifi- cally intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

WARNING Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and tow- ing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or dam- age.

If the disabled vehicle cannot be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact an authorized Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.

Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.

Keep away from the vehicle dur- ing towing.

6 35

What to do in an emergency

Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.

Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during towing.

NOTICE Emergency towing is not legal in all states. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and tow the vehicle.

Emergency towing precautions Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isnt locked. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral). Release the parking bake. Press the brake pedal with more force

than normal since you will have reduced brake performance.

More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.

If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake per- formance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.

CAUTION - Automatic transaxle

If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neu- tral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehi- cle to operate the steering and brakes.

To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing.

Before towing, check the auto- matic transaxle fluid leak under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.

OTD069011

7

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-4

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-19

Engine oil / 7-22

Engine coolant / 7-23

Brake/clutch fluid / 7-26

Washer fluid / 7-27

Parking brake / 7-27

Air cleaner / 7-28

Climate control air filter / 7-29

Wiper blades / 7-31

Battery / 7-34

Tires and wheels / 7-37

Fuses / 7-51

Light bulbs / 7-60

Appearance care / 7-70

Emission control system / 7-76

California perchlorate notice / 7-79

Maintenance

Maintenance

27

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ORB070100

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

3. Radiator cap

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse box

9. Positive battery terminal

10. Negative battery terminal

* : if equipped

7 3

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection proce- dures. Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehi- cle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform this work. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac- tory-trained technicians and genuine HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational prob- lems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or person- al injury.

Owners responsibility

NOTICE Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compli- ance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties. Detailed warranty information is provided in your Owners Handbook & Warranty Information booklet. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered. We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAIs high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. As explained earlier in this section, sev- eral procedures can be done only by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

NOTICE Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Owners Handbook & Warranty Information booklet provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv- icing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Maintenance

47

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel: Check the engine oil level. Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir. Check the windshield washer fluid

level. Look for low or under-inflated tires. Check the radiator and condenser.

Check if the front of the radiator and condenser are clean and not blocked with leaves, dirt or insects etc. If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condi- tion, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Maintenance work

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing. These can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Therefore, if you must run the engine while work- ing under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (espe- cially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose cloth- ing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNING Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure. This could cause burns or other serious injury.

7 5

Maintenance

While operating your vehicle: Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or pulls to one side when trav- eling on smooth, level road.

When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or hard- to-push brake pedal.

If any slipping or changes in the oper- ation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.

Check automatic transaxle P (Park) function.

Check parking brake. Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition- ing system during or after use is nor- mal).

At least monthly: Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir. Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig- nals and hazard warning flashers.

Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare (if equipped).

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall): Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage. Check windshield washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with wash- er fluid.

Check headlight alignment. Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps. Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function. Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year: Clean body and door drain holes. Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

hood hinges. Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches. Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips. Check the air conditioning system. Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls. Clean battery and terminals. Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

67

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, fol- low Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions. Repeated short distance driving. Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas. Extensive use of brakes. Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used. Driving on rough or muddy roads. Driving in mountainous areas. Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation. Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.

More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90F (32C).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) continue to follow the pre- scribed maintenance intervals.

7 7

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Replace engine oil and filter

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter- mined by whichever occurs first.

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

(Continued) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace engine oil and filter

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Maintenance

87

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace engine oil and filter (22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched- ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) (Continued) Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *2

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

Inspect parking brake Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter

Replace engine oil and filter (30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

7 9

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Replace engine oil and filter (37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

Replace engine oil and filter (45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

Maintenance

107

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

(Continued)

(Continued) Inspect fuel filter *2

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

Inspect parking brake Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Inspect valve clearance (Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter

Replace engine oil and filter (60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace engine oil and filter (52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched- ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 11

Maintenance

67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace engine oil and filter (67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

(Continued) Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

Replace engine oil and filter (75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

Maintenance

127

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

(Continued)

(Continued) Inspect fuel filter *2

Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

Inspect parking brake Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter

Replace engine oil and filter (90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace engine oil and filter (82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched- ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety mat- ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob- lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 13

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace spark plugs (iridium plated, every 97,500 miles)

Replace engine oil and filter (97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

(Continued)

Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

Replace engine oil and filter (105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

Maintenance

7

(Continued) Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

Inspect parking brake Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Inspect valve clearance (Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter Replace engine oil and filter

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months) Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months

after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months) Add fuel additive *1 (120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) Replace engine oil and filter

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *2

(Continued)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched- ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety mat- ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob- lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

14

7 15

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace engine oil and filter (127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

(Continued)

Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)

Replace engine oil and filter (135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

Maintenance

167

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect vacuum hose Inspect air conditioning refrigerant Inspect brake hoses and lines Inspect drive shafts and boots Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped) Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Inspect suspension mounting bolts Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid Inspect fuel filter *2

(Continued)

(Continued) Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2

Inspect parking brake Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) Inspect drive belts *3

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) Replace air cleaner filter

Replace engine oil and filter (150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months

Rotate tires Inspect battery condition Inspect air cleaner filter Inspect vacuum hose

Replace engine oil and filter (142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

Add fuel additive *1

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi- tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance sched- ule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety mat- ters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting prob- lem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7 17

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

No check, No service required

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Maintenance

187

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in nor-

mal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread

roads D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very

cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90F (32C) G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h) K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE

OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I

MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, F, G, H, I

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, F

PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G, H, I

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

7 19

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more fre- quent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an exces- sive amount of foreign matter accumu- lates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con- nections Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con- nections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indi- cate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat dam- age or mechanical wear.

Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are pres- ent. Hoses should be replaced immedi- ately if there is any evidence of deterio- ration or damage.

Air cleaner filter A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Cooling system Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

207

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions. But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.

NOTICE Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi- cally red. As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker. It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) Inspect the manual transaxle fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch fluid Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Valve clearance Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should perform the operation.

Parking brake Inspect the parking brake system includ- ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust pipe and muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf- fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

CAUTION The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunc- tion and failure. Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8.)

7 21

Maintenance

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if nec- essary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and con- nections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

227

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capaci- ties in section 8.)

ORB071004N

WARNING - Radiator hose Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result. Do not spill engine oil, when adding

or changing engine oil. If you spill engine oil in the engine room, wipe it off immediately.

ORB071003N

7 23

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil and filter Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the begin- ning of this section.

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant.The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

ENGINE COOLANT

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI- TION 65 WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and reproductive harm. Used engine oil may cause irrita- tion or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory ani- mals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

Maintenance

247

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio- rated hoses. The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool. If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) or soft water. Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If fre- quent additions are required, see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system inspection.

ORB071005N

(Continued) Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing seri- ous injury.

WARNING Removing radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radi- ator cap while the engine is oper- ating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in seri- ous personal injury from escap- ing hot coolant or steam.

Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cool- ing system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

(Continued)

WARNING The electric motor (cooling fan) is con- trolled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure

and vehicle speed. It may some- times operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blades. As the engine coolant tem- perature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. If your vehicle is equipped with GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan) may operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.

7 25

Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant When adding coolant, use only deion-

ized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improp- er coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to pre- vent corrosion and freezing.

DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol- lowing table.

Changing the coolant Have coolant changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING - Coolant Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

CAUTION Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as generator.

WARNING Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pres- sure causing serious injury.

ORBC072006

5F (-15C) 35 65

-13F (-25C) 40 60

-31F (-35C) 50 50

-49F (-45C) 60 40

Ambient Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

Maintenance

267

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri- odically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination. If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition asso- ciated with the wear of the brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system or clutch (if equipped) checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubricants or capaci- ties in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake/clutch fluid

When changing and adding brake fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake/ clutch fluid

In the event the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result. Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of miner- al-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts.

ORBC070007

7 27

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection. Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of clicks heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fair- ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 6~8 clicks at a force of 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

WARNING - Coolant Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim.

Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under cer- tain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur.

Windshield washer fluid is poi- sonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur.

ORBC070009 ORB050003

PARKING BRAKE

Maintenance

287

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be cleaned and reused. You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner. 3. Replace the air cleaner filter. 4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching

clips.

ORB073010 ORB073011 ORB070012

7 29

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele- ment more often than the usual recom- mended intervals. (Refer to Maintenance under severe usage condi- tions in this section.)

Filter inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it per- forming the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other compo- nents.

Filter replacement 1. Open the glove box and remove the

support strap (1).

CAUTION Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces- sive engine wear.

When removing the air cleaner fil- ter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could dam- age the air flow sensor and engine.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

ORB070060

Maintenance

307

2. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers by turning them counter- clockwise on both sides.

3. Remove the climate control air filter cover while pressing the lock of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter. 5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

NOTICE Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol () facing downwards. Otherwise, the climate control effects may decrease, possibly with a noise.

OBK075017ORB070014ORB070013

7 31

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection NOTICE Commercial hot waxes applied by auto- matic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the wind- shield wipers. Common sources of con- tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commer- cial car washes. If the blades are not wip- ing properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade- quately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122 CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manual- ly.

CAUTION The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunc- tion and failure.

Maintenance

327

Front windshield wiper blade Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Front windshield wiper blade Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLM079200 OLM079201 OHM078059

7 33

Maintenance

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade (if equipped) 1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slight- ly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper blade.

OYF079061

OYF079062

OHM078062 OHM078063

Maintenance

347

For best battery service Keep the battery securely mounted. Keep the battery top clean and dry. Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the bat- tery cables.

BATTERY

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com- bustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi- ate medical attention.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or a burning sensa- tion, get medical attention immediately.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

The battery contains lead. Do not dispose of it after use. Please return the battery to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to be recycled.

When lifting a plastic-cased bat- tery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

(Continued)

Pb

ORB073016

7 35

Maintenance

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery. If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example the headlights or interior lights were left on while vehicle was not in use) jump start the vehicle from another battery and run the engine at least 20 minutes at idle before driving. Do not turn off the engine for 30 minutes total of idle and/or driving as the battery may not have sufficient recharge to start.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI- TION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and relat- ed accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproduc- tive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

(Continued)

Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn- ings can result in serious bodily injury or death.

CAUTION When you dont use the vehicle

for a long time in low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors.

Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature area.

If you connect unauthorized elec- tronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.

Make sure the battery cap is closed. If the battery cap is not closed securely, it can malfunc- tion because the electric compo- nents are exposed to moisture.

WARNING Separating the battery from the vehicle should be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Maintenance

367

Reset items Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected. Sunroof (See section 4) Trip computer (See section 4) Climate control system

(See section 4) Clock (See section 4) Audio (See section 4)

WARNING Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is discon- nected.

Operation related to the battery should be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Recharging battery

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions: The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.

Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.

Watch the battery during charg- ing, and stop or reduce the charg- ing rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120F (49C).

Wear eye protection when check- ing the battery during charging.

Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

7 37

Maintenance

CAUTION Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pres- sures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an author- ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of dam- age from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. Cold Tires mean the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km). Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to Tire and wheels in section 8.

All specifications (sizes and pres- sures) can be found on a label attached to the drivers side center pillar.

WARNING - Tire underin- flation

Severe underinflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

ORB070017

Maintenance

387

Checking tire inflation pressure Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check Use a good quality gage to check tire pressure.You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by look- ing at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tire Inflation Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressure Always observe the following: Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than one mile (1.6 km) since startup.)

Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.

Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

Worn, old tires can cause acci- dents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres- sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pres- sure or the tires will be under- inflated.

Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

7 39

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firm- ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjust- ment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the rec- ommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and mois- ture.

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom- mended that the tires be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops. During rotation, check the tires for correct balance. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, out- of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

WARNING Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.

Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly caus- ing poor handling, loss of vehi- cle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pres- sure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the dri- ver's side center pillar.

Worn tires can cause acci- dents. Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

Remember to check the pres- sure of your spare tire. HYUNDAI recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehi- cle.

Maintenance

407

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

NOTICE Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.

Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

OBH078040

Without a spare tire WARNING

Do not use the compact spare tire (if equipped) for tire rota- tion.

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circum- stances. This may cause unusual handling characteris- tics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage.

CAUTION Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's alu- minum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

7 41

Maintenance

Tire replacement If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac- ing the tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacing tires

To reduce the chance or serious or fatal injuries from an acci- dent caused by tire failure or loss of vehicle control: Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effec- tiveness, steering control, and traction.

Do not drive your vehicle with too little or too much pressure in your tires. This can lead to uneven wear and tire failure.

When replacing tires, never mix radial and bias-ply tires on the same car. You must replace all tires (including the spare) if moving from radial to bias-ply tires.

(Continued)

(Continued) Using tires and wheel other

than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehi- cle control, resulting in a seri- ous accident.

Wheels that do not meet HYUNDAIs specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.

The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. Tire size can affect wheel speed. When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a differ- ent size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESC (Electronic Stability Control) to work irregularly.

Maintenance

427

Compact spare tire replacement (if equipped) A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount- ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

Tire traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

WARNING A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling char- acteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, head- light aim and bumper height.

7 43

Maintenance

Tire sidewall labeling This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac- teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation A tires sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replace- ment tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and num- bers in the tire size designation mean. Example tire size designation: (These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designa- tor could vary depending on your vehicle.) P195/50R16 84H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix P are intended for use on passenger cars or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking).

195 - Tire width in millimeters. 50 - Aspect ratio. The tires section

height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial). 16 - Rim diameter in inches.

84 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor- tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The follow- ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa- tion mean.

Example wheel size designation: 6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches. J - Rim contour designation. 16 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

2 3

4

5,6

7

Maintenance

447

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif- ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe oper- ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of num- bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufactur- ing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four num- bers indicate week and year manu- factured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2015.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum Speed Speed Rating Symbol

WARNING - Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, it is recommended that tires generally be replaced after six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading condi- tions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an acci- dent involving serious injury or death.

7 45

Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rub- ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire man- ufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply construc- tion; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi- mum section width. For example: TREAD wear 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a- half times (1) as well on the gov- ernment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on speci- fied government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight- ahead braking traction tests, and does not include accelera- tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Maintenance

467

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labora- tory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped) Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks. Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and brak- ing, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise com- pare with normal tires.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death.

CAUTION Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easi- er to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below. When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not dam- aged.

(Continued)

7 47

Maintenance

Tire terminology and definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- pascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional acces- sories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transaxle, power seats, and air con- ditioning. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- pascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des- ignator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.

(Continued) If the tire is impacted, inspect

the tire condition or contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,800miles (3,000km).

CAUTION It is not easy to recognize the

tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slight- est hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leak- age from the tire.

If the tire is damaged by driv- ing on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

You can find out the tire infor- mation on the tire sidewall.

Maintenance

487

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat- ed by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load ratings: The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- sponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- mum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum per- missible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg). Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- ticular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Pneumatic tire: A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automo- tive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load. Production options weight: The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previ- ously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- ed tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seat- ed. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

7 49

Maintenance

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- ture and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce- dures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- ber of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight. Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight and dviding by 2. Vehicle Placard: A label permanent- ly attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and rec- ommended inflation pressure.

All season tires HYUNDAI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rat- ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions. HYUNDAI recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; other- wise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the stan- dard tires on the tire label on the dri- ver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Maintenance

507

Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your car is equipped with snow tires.

Tire chains Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the front wheels. Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufactur- er's instructions. To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed.

Radial-ply tires Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radi- al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combina- tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to fol- low is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four. Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

WARNING - Snow or ice When driving on roads cov-

ered with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Use the SAE S class or wire chains.

If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.

To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driv- ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with alu- minum wheels. In unavoid- able circumstance, use a wire type chain.

Use wire chains less than 0.59 inches (15 mm) to prevent damage to the chains con- nection.

CAUTION Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains.

7 51

Maintenance

A vehicles electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses. This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat- ed in the drivers side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicles lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appro- priate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted. If the electrical system does not work, first check the drivers side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, move to safe place, turn off the engine and all electric devices, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating. If the replacement fuse blows, this indi- cates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse replace- ment

Never replace a fuse with any- thing but another fuse of the same rating.

A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.

Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTION Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

ORB072110

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Multi fuse

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

FUSES

Maintenance

527

NOTICE The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.

Instrument panel fuse replace- ment 1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off. 2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse. If the headlights or other electrical com- ponents do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse or

relay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. The incomplete fas- tening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle wiring and electric sys- tems damage and a possible fire.

Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and termi- nals may be fastened incomplete- ly, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts are blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not input any other objects except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driv- er or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.

ORB070018

Drivers side panel

ORB070019

7 53

Maintenance

Memory fuse Your vehicle is equipped with a memory fuse to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods. 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights. 3. Open the drivers side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

NOTICE If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime, audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., will not operate. Some items must be reset after replacement. Refer to Battery in this section.

Even though the memory fuse is pulled up, the battery can still be dis- charged by operation of the head- lights or other electrical devices.

If you need to park your vehicle for prolonged periods more than 1 month, pull up the memory fuse to prevent the battery being discharged.

ORB070020

CAUTION Do not pull up the memory fuse

and always place the memory fuse in the original position while driving the vehicle.

Do not pull up the memory fuse repeatedly. The memory fuse may be worn out.

Maintenance

547

Engine compartment fuse replacement 1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off. 2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up. 3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine com- partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Multi fuse If the multi fuse is blown, replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating when the ignition switch and all other switches are off.

CAUTION After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover. If not, electrical failures may occur from water contact.

ORB070021 ORB070022

CAUTION Before removing the multi fuse,

disconnect the (-) terminal of bat- tery.

Do not disassemble or assemble the multi fuse fastened with bolts or nuts.The fuse may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible fire. If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7 55

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehi- cle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

Drivers side panel Engine compartment

ORB070023/ORB070024

Maintenance

567

ORB075074N

Instrument panel (Drivers side fuse panel)

57

Maintenance

Instrument panel (Drivers side fuse panel)

Description Fuse rating Protected component 9SPARE 15A Not Used

POWER OUTLET 15A Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Power Outlet)

C/LIGHTER 15A Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet (Cigarette Lighter)

ACC 10A Audio, Power Outside Mirror Switch

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)

A/BAG 10A SRS Control Module, Telltale, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

T/SIG 10A Hazard Switch

MDPS 10A EPS Control Module

WIPER RR 15A Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Rear Wiper Motor 7SPARE 10A Not Used 6SPARE 15A Not Used

FOG LAMP FRT 10A Front Fog Lamp Relay

DRL 10A DRL (Daytime Running Light) Relay

STOP LAMP 15A Stop Lamp Switch, Battery Sensor, Stop Lamp Relay, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (HAC Relay), Data Link Connector

CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster (MICOM, IND.), BCM

IG1 10A Stop Lamp Switch, ECO Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Heater Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL. EPS Control Module, Rheostat

ABS 10A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, ESC Off Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Multipurpose Check Connector, HAC Relay)

B/UP LAMP 10A Back-Up Lamp Switch

ECU 10A ECM, PCM

1IG2 10A Power Window Relay, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster (MICOM), BCM, Sunroof Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)

2IG2 10A A/C Control Module, BCM, SMK Unit, Wiper Control Unit

HAZARD 15A Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch 2SPARE 25A Not Used

7

Maintenance

7

Description Fuse rating Protected component SUNROOF 15A Sunroof Motor 3SPARE 10A Not Used

TCU 15A Vehicle Speed Sensor, Transaxle Range Switch 4SPARE 15A Not used 1SPARE 10A Not used

WIPER FRT 25A Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Front Wiper Motor

DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Two Turn Unlock Relay, Driver Door Lock Actuator SAFETY POWER WINDOW

25A Safety Power Window Module

S/HEATER 15A Driver/Passenger Seat Heater Module 5SPARE 10A Not Used

ROOM LAMP 10A Instrument Cluster (IND.,ILL.), Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, BCM, A/C Control Module, Luggage Room Lamp, Trunk Room Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Map Lamp

AUDIO 20A Audio

TAIL LAMP LH 10A Rear Combination Lamp LH, Head Lamp LH, Front Turn Signal Lamp LH, License Lamp LH/RH (4Door), License Lamp (5Door)

TAIL LAMP RH 10A

Head Lamp RH, Rear Combination Lamp RH, Rheostat, Audio, Front Turn Signal Lamp RH, Hazard Switch, Instrument Cluster (ILL.+), AUX & USB Jack, ESC Off Switch, A/C Switch, ECO Switch, Multifunction Switch (Remote Control), A/C Control Module, Rear Defogger Switch, Front Deicer Switch, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL.

START 10A Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock Switch

H/LAMP 10A Instrument Cluster, Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp Relay)

P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH

P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH, Passenger Power Window Switch

HTD MIRR 10A ECM, PCM, Rear Defogger Switch, Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror

A/CON 10A A/C Control Module (Auto A/C)

BLOWER 10A ECM, PCM, Blower Switch, Blower Resistor, A/C Control Module (Manual A/C)

58

7 59

Maintenance

ORB075075A

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Maintenance

7

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MULTI FUSE

MDPS 80A EPS Control Module

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

RR HTD 40A I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)

ABS 2 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module

ABS 1 40A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ALT 125A Alternator, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Multi Fuse : ABS 1, ABS 2, MDPS, RR HTD, BLOWER, Fuse : A/CON)

B+1 50A I/P Junction Box (Power Connector Fuse : ROOM LP 1, AUDIO, Fuse : FOG LP FRT, ROOM LP 2, STOP LP, Relay : Tail Lamp)

FUSE

IG2 40A Start Relay, Ignition Switch

IG1 40A Ignition Switch

ECU 1 30A Fuse : ECU 2, Engine Control Relay

C/FAN 40A Cooling Fan (High) Relay, Cooling Fan (Low) Relay

B+2 50A I/P Junction Box (Fuse : S/HEATER, SUNROOF, DR LOCK, HAZARD, Relay : Power Window)

HORN 10A Horn Relay

F/PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay

H/LAMP RH 10A Head Lamp RH

H/LAMP LH 10A Head Lamp LH

H/LAMP 10A Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp Relay)

INJECTOR 15A ECM, PCM, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down), Fuel Pump Relay

SENSOR 10A ECM, PCM, Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, Immobilizer Module, A/CON Relay, Cooling Fan (High) Relay, Cooling Fan (Low) Relay

ECU 2 10A ECM, PCM

IGN COIL 15A Ignition Coil #1 ~ #4, Condenser

B/UP LAMP 10A PCM, Transaxle Range Switch, Instrument Cluster, Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL.

WIPER 10A ECM, PCM, Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Front Wiper Motor

60

7 61

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only bulbs of the specified wattage.

NOTICE After heavy, driving rain or washing, headlight and taillight lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesnt indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING - Working on the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fin- gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electrical wiring system.

CAUTION If you dont have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expert- ise, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing the headlight assembly can result in damage to the vehi- cle.

Do not install additional bulbs or LED type bulbs. If you install that, the lamp may not be operated properly and fuse box or electrical wiring system may have a prob- lem.

Maintenance

627

Headlight, position light, turn sig- nal light, side marker light and front fog light bulb replacement (1) Headlight (High/Low) (2) Front turn signal light / Position light (3) Front turn signal light (4) Position light (5) Side marker (6) Front fog light (if equipped)

Headlight / Side marker (Bulb type only) 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise. 3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-

connector. 4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining

wire by depressing the end and push- ing it upward.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly.

6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap the headlight bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.

7. Connect the headlight bulb socket- connector.

8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn- ing it clockwise.

NOTICE Always have the headlight aiming adjusted after an accident or the head- light assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ORB075025K

ORB073025

MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

ORB074076N

Bi-Function Projection Headlamp ORB071048N

MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

7 63

Maintenance

NOTICE - Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

This headlamp is bi-function type that switches the low beam to high or the high beam to low using solenoid system. So, sound may be heard when the head- lamp switches the low beam to high or the high beam to low and it does not indicate malfunction of the headlamp.

(Continued) Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra- sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlight.

If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

Wear eye protection when chang- ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

WARNING - Halogen bulbs Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.

(Continued)

ORB073078

ORB073079

Headlamp (Low beam)

Headlamp (High beam) OHD076046

ORB073072

MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

Maintenance

647

Turn signal light / Position light (Bulb type only) 1. Turn off the engine and open the hood. 2. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counter- clockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket

4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

5. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Front fog light bulbs (if equipped) 1. Remove the front bumper under cover. 2. Reach your hand into the back of the

front bumper. 3. Disconnect the power connector from

the socket.

ORBC070030

ORBC070031

ORBC070049

ORB074077N

MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp

Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

7 65

Maintenance

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.

6. Connect the power connector to the socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.

Side repeater light bulb replace- ment (if equipped) Type A 1. Remove the light assembly from the

vehicle by prying the lens and pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connec- tor.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket. 6. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part. 7. Connect the bulb electrical connector. 8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

ORB070068

Maintenance

667

Type B If the light bulb does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE A skilled technician should check or repair the side repeater lamp. Otherwise, it may damage related parts (ex. outside mirror).

Rear combination light bulb replacement (4 Door) (1) Stop and tail light (2) Rear turn signal light (3) Back-up light (4) Side marker

1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the service cover by pulling

out the service cover.

ORB070054 ORB075033K ORBC070034

7 67

Maintenance

3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counter- clockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

7. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole.

Rear combination light bulb replacement (5 Door) (1) Tail light (2) Rear turn signal light (3) Back-up light (4) Stop and tail light (5) Side marker

1. Open the tailgate. 2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

screws with a cross-tip screwdriver. 3. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the vehicle.

ORB071056

ORB071057

ORB071051N ORB071033

Maintenance

687

4. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counter- clockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

9. Tighten the screws.

High mounted stop light bulb replacement (if equipped) 4 Door 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-

terclockwise. 3. Replace the bulb from the socket. 4. Install the socket by turning it clock-

wise.

ORBC070043

ORBC070036

ORB071058N

7 69

Maintenance

5 Door If the light is not operating, have the vehi- cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE A skilled technician should check or repair the high mounted stop light. Otherwise, it may damage related parts of the vehicle. License plate light bulb replace-

ment 4 Door 1. Remove the trunk trim. 2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-

terclockwise. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Install a new bulb. 5. Install the socket by turning it clock-

wise. 6. Install the trunk trim.

ORBC070041

ORBC070042

ORB071043

Maintenance

707

5 Door 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove

the light assembly from the vehicle by prying the lens gently.

2. Remove the socket from the lens. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out. 4. Install a new bulb in the socket and

install the socket to the lens. 5. Reinstall the lens securely. Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the lens into place.

5. If the map lamp and room lamp are not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING Prior to working on the Interior Lights, ensure that the OFF but- ton is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

ORB070065

ORB070064

Front map lamp

Room lamp ORB071055

CAUTION Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

7 71

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washers,

make sure to maintain sufficient dis- tance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component dam- age or water penetration.

Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or con- nectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pres- sure water.

Finish maintenance Washing

To help protect your vehicles finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water. If you use your vehicle for off-road driv- ing, you should wash it after each off- road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicles finish if not removed immediately. Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used. After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTION Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle. Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

WARNING - Wet brakes After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow for- ward speed.

Maintenance

727

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint. Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturers instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.

During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preserva- tive. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

CAUTION Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the pro- tective coating and cause discol- oration or paint deterioration.

CAUTION Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure water washing may cause the fail- ure of electrical circuits or engine and related components located in the engine compartment.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electri- cal/electronic components and air duct inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

OJB037800

7 73

Maintenance

Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may col- lect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection. Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish. Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.

Clean the wheel when it has cooled. Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps pre- vent corrosion.

Avoid washing the wheels with high- speed car wash brushes.

Do not use any alkaline or acid deter- gent. It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corro- sion, we produce cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your car are: Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the car.

Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unpro- tected metal exposed to corrosion.

WARNING After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow for- ward speed.

Maintenance

747

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly impor- tant. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when tempera- tures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by mois- ture that is slow to evaporate. Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dis- persed. For all these reasons, it is par- ticularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get- ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.

If you live in a high-corrosion area where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc., you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your car at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

7 75

Maintenance

When cleaning underneath the car, give particular attention to the compo- nents under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accu- mulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pres- sure and steam are particularly effec- tive in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favor- able environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of cor- rosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high- ly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possi- ble.

Don't neglect the interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care Interior general precautions Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos- metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri- cal/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the sur- face may get stripped off.

Maintenance

767

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recom- mended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web- bing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc- tions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi- cle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabrics appearance and fire- resistant properties.

CAUTION Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

7 77

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty infor- mation contained in the Owners Handbook & Warranty Information book- let in your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with an emis- sion control system to meet all applicable emission regulations. There are three emission control sys- tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system (2) Evaporative emission control system (3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recom- mended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system) To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

After dynamometer testing is com- pleted, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys- tem is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmos- phere. (The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Maintenance

787

Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) The purge control solenoid valve is con- trolled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temper- ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos- es so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms- up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or dura- bility and may even violate governmen- tal safety and emissions regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, bat- tery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide) Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever sus- pect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust Engine exhaust gases contain car- bon monoxide (CO). Though color- less and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSI- TION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehi- cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer- tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

7 79

Maintenance

Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.

When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.

Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi- cle for any extended time with the engine running.

When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device. Therefore, the following precautions must be observed: Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engines. Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of per- formance.

Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.

Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).

Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control sys- tem. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

WARNING - Fire A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi- cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegeta- tion, paper, leaves, etc.

The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot while the engine is running or immediately after the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned. Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for cor- rosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz- ardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers: Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

7 80

Maintenance

8

Engine / 8-2

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-2

Tires and wheels / 8-3

Capacity/weight / 8-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6

Vehicle certification label / 8-6

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7

Engine number / 8-7

Refrigerant label / 8-7

Consumer information / 8-8

Reporting safety defects / 8-9

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

28

ENGINE BULB WATTAGE

Item 4 Door 5 Door Overall length 172 (4370) 162 (4115) Overall width 66.9 (1700) 66.9 (1700) Overall height 57.1 (1450) 57.1 (1450)

Front tread P175/70 R14 59.3 (1507) 59.3 (1507) P195/50 R16 58.6 (1489) 58.6 (1489)

Rear tread P175/70 R14 59.5 (1511) 59.5 (1511) P195/50 R16 58.8 (1493) 58.8 (1493)

Wheelbase 101.2 (2570) 101.2 (2570)

Item Gasoline 1.6

Displacement cu. in (cc)

97.09 (1591)

Bore x Stroke in. (mm)

3.03x3.36 (77x85.44)

Firing order 1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders 4, In-line

DIMENSIONS in (mm)

* : If equipped

Type A : MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp Type B : Bi-Function Projection Headlamp

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Headlights (Low/High) Type A 55/60 HB2 L/L

Type B 60 9005L+

Front turn signal lights 28/8 PY28/8W

Position lights Type A 5 W5W L/L

Type B LED LED

Side marker lamp Type A 5 W5W L/L

Type B LED LED

Side repeater lights* 5 WY5W

Front fog lights* 27 GE881

Stop and tail light* 28/8 P28/8W

Rear turn signal lights 4 Door 27 PY27W

5 Door 27 PY27W

Back-up lights 16 W16W

High mounted stop light*

4 Door 16 W16W

5 Door 5 W5W L/L

License plate lights 5 W5W L/L

Map lamps 8 FESTOON

Room lamp 8 FESTOON

Luggage lamp* 5 W5W

8 3

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

TIRES AND WHEELS

Item Tire size Wheel size Inflation pressure bar psi (kPa)

Wheel lug nut torque lbft (kgm, Nm)

Normal load*1 Maximum load Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire P175/70 R14 5.5Jx14

33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

65~79 (9~11, 88~107)

P195/50 R16 6.0Jx16

Compact spare tire*2

(if equipped) T125/80 D15 3.5Jx15 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420)

CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item Gasoline 1.6

Gross vehicle weight lbs. (kg)

4 Door 3,527 (1600) 5 Door 3,549 (1610)

Luggage volume cu ft (l)

4 Door 13.7 (389) 5 Door 21.2 (600)

*1 Normal load : Up to 3 persons

*2 If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.

CAUTION When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

48

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy. These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page. *2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing

the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a years time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill) Recommends 3.8 US qt. (3.6 l) API Service SM*3,

ILSAC GF-4 or above

Manual transaxle fluid 1.9 ~ 2.01 US qt.

(1.8~1.9 l )

HK MTF 70W (SK) SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL)

GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX) API GL-4, SAE 70W

Use the manual transaxle fluid approved by HYUNDAI motor company.

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-4, SK ATF SP-4 NOCA ATF SP-4, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-4 or other

brands meeting the above specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,

Coolant 4.7 US qt. (5.3 l) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake/clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 11.4 US gal. (43 l) Unleaded gasoline

8 5

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

Recommended SAE viscosity number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for sat- isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those rec- ommended could result in engine dam- age.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be oper- ated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or drain- ing any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Engine Oil *1

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

C (F)

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

68

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the floor under the front passengers seat. To check the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

The vehicle certification label attached on the drivers side center pillar contains the vehicle identification number (VIN).

ORBC080001 ORBC080002

VIN label

ORB080003

8 7

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best perform- ance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures rec- ommended for your car.

ENGINE NUMBER

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

The refrigerant label is located on the underside of the hood. The label contains the following informa- tion: Type of refrigerant/oil Amount of refrigerant/oil

ORB071070NORB070017 ORB080005

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

88

This consumer information has been pre- pared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Your Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN- ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest Hyundai Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region 1122 Cranbury South River Road Jamesburg, NJ 08831 (800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia.

Southern Region 3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066 (800) 633-5151

South Central Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region 1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019 (800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region 1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois 60506 (800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Arizona, California Colorado, Hawaii, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region 10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box 20850 Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850 (800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION

8 9

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defeccts

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE West Building Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

IIndex

Index

2I

Active ECO system 5-32

Air bag warning label 3-60

Air bag warning light 3-37

Air bags 3-34

Air bag warning label 3-60

Air bag warning light 3-37

Curtain air bag 3-51

Driver's and passenger's front air bag 3-46

Occupant detection system 3-40

Side impact air bag 3-50

SRS components and functions 3-37

Air cleaner 7-28

Antenna (Roof) 4-97

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-19

Appearance care 7-70

Exterior care 7-70

Interior care 7-74

Armrest(front) 3-6

Audio system 4-97

Roof antenna 4-97

Steering wheel audio control 4-98

Automatic climate control system 4-76

Air conditioning 4-82

Automatic heating and air conditioning 4-77

Manual heating and air conditioning 4-78

Automatic transaxle Manual shift mode 5-12

Automatic transaxle 5-10

Aux, USB and iPod port 4-94

Base curb weight 5-48

Battery 7-34

Battery saver function 4-53

Before driving 5-3

Bottle holders, see cup holders 4-90

Brake system 5-16

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-19

Electronic stability control (ESC) 5-21

Hill-start assist control 5-27

Parking brake 5-17

Power brakes 5-16

Vehicle stability management 5-26

Brakes/clutch fluid 7-26

Bulb replacement 7-61

Bulb wattage 8-2

California perchlorate notice 7-79

Capacities (Lubricants) 8-4

Care

Exterior care 7-71

Interior care 7-75

Tire care 7-37

A

B

C

I 3

Index

Cargo capacity 5-44

Cargo weight 5-48

Center console storage 4-87

Central door lock switch 4-9

Certification label 5-46

Certification label 8-6

Chains

Tire chains 5-40

Changing tires 6-18

Checking tire inflation pressure 7-38

Child restraint system 3-26

Lower anchor 3-32

Seat belt 3-27

Tether anchor system 3-30

Child-protector rear door lock 4-11

Climate control air filter 4-75

Climate control air filter 7-28

Clock (Digital) 4-92

Clothes hanger 4-92

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster 4-36

Compact spare tire 6-23

Compact spare tire replacement 7-42

Coolant 7-23

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant 7-23

Crankcase emission control system 7-76

Cruise control system 5-28

Cup holder 4-90

Curtain air bag 3-51

Dashboard illumination,

see instrument panel illumination 4-37

Dashboard, see instrument cluster 4-36

Defogging (Windshield) 4-83

Defogging logic (Windshield) 4-85

Defroster (Rear window) 4-66

Defrosting (Windshield) 4-83

Digital clock 4-92

Dimensions 8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-37

Displays, see instrument cluster 4-36

Door locks 4-7

Central door lock switch 4-9

Child-protector rear door lock 4-11

Drinks holders, see cup holders 4-90

Driver's 3-point seat belt 3-16

Driver's and passenger's front air bag 3-46

Driving at night 5-36

Driving in flooded areas 5-37

Driving in the rain 5-37

Economical operation 5-33

Electric power steering 4-30

Electronic stability control (ESC) 5-21

D

E

Index

4I

Emergency starting 6-4

Jump starting 6-4

Push starting 6-5

Emergency while driving 6-2

Emission control system 7-76

Crankcase emission control system 7-76

Evaporative emission control System 7-76

Exhaust emission control system 7-77

Engine 8-2

Engine compartment 2-4

Engine coolant 7-23

Engine number 8-7

Engine oil 7-22

Engine overheats 6-6

Engine temperature gauge 4-38

Engine will not start 6-3

Evaporative emission control system 7-75

Exhaust emission control system 7-76

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-19

Exterior care 7-70

Flat tire (with spare tire) 6-17

Jack and tools 6-17

Changing tires 6-18

Compact spare tire 6-23

Removing and storing the spare tire 6-18

Flat tire (with tire mobility kit) 6-25

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-93

Fluid

Brakes/clutch fluid 7-26

Washer fluid 7-27

Folding the rear seat 3-11

Front passenger and rear seat belt 3-17

Front seat adjustment 3-5

Fuel filler lid 4-23

Fuel gauge 4-39

Fuel requirements 1-3

Fuses 7-51

Fuse/relay panel description 7-54

Instrument panel fuse 7-52

Memory fuse 7-52

Multi fuse 7-54

Gauge

Engine temperature gauge 4-38

Fuel gauge 4-39

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-48

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-48

Glove box 4-88

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-48

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-48

F

G

I 5

Index

Hazard warning flasher 4-53

Hazardous driving conditions 5-35

Headrest(front) 3-6

Headrest(rear) 3-9

Height adjustment 3-16

Highway driving 5-38

Hill-start assist control 5-27

Hood 4-21

Horn 4-32

How to use this manual 1-2

Indicators and warnings 4-44

Inside rearview mirror 4-32

Instrument cluster 4-36

Engine temperature gauge 4-38

Fuel gauge 4-39

Instrument panel illumination 4-37

Odometer 4-40

Speedometer 4-37

Tachometer 4-37

Trip computer 4-39

Warning and indicators 4-44

Instrument panel fuse 7-52

Instrument panel illumination 4-37

Instrument panel overview 2-3

Interior care 7-74

Interior features 4-88

Aux, USB and iPod port 4-94

Cargo area cover 4-93

Clothes hanger 4-92

Cup holder 4-90

Digital clock 4-92

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-93

Power outlet 4-91

Sunvisor 4-90

Interior light 4-63

Interior overview 2-2

Jack and tools 6-17

Jump starting 6-4

Key 5-5

Keys 4-3

I

H

J

K

Index

6I

Label

Air bag warning label 3-60

Refrigerant label 8-7

Tire sidewall labeling 7-43

Tire specification and pressure label 8-7

Vehicle certification label 8-6

Light bulbs 7-60

Lighting 4-53

Battery saver function 4-53

Lower anchor 3-32

Lubricants and capacities 8-4

Luggage net 4-89

Maintenance

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-19

Maintenance services 7-3

Maintenance under severe usage conditions 7-18

Normal maintenance schedule 7-7

Owner maintenance 7-4

Scheduled maintenance service 7-6

Tire maintenance 7-42

Maintenance schedule 7-6

Maintenance under severe usage conditions 7-18

Normal maintenance schedule 7-7

Maintenance services 7-3

Manual climate control system 4-67

Air conditioning 4-72

Climate control air filter 4-75

Heating and air conditioning 4-68

Manual shift mode 5-12

Manual transaxle 5-7

Memory fuse 7-52

Mirrors 4-32

Day/night rearview mirror 4-32

Inside rearview mirror 4-32

Side view mirror 4-33

Multi fuse 7-54

Occupant detection system 3-40

Odometer 4-40

Oil (Engine) 7-22

Overheats 6-6

Owner maintenance 7-4

L

O

M

I 7

Index

Parking brake 5-17

Parking brake 7-26

Power brakes 5-16

Power outlet 4-91

Power window lock button 4-19

Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-20

Push starting 6-5

Rear center belt 3-18

Rear seat 3-9

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures 7-36

Recommended lubricants and capacities 8-4

Recommended SAE viscosity number 8-5

Refrigerant label 8-7

Remote keyless entry 4-6

Replacement light bulb 7-61

Road warning 6-2

Rocking the vehicle 5-35

Roof antenna 4-97

Scheduled maintenance service 7-6

Maintenance under severe usage conditions 7-18

Normal maintenance schedule 7-7

Seat belt warning 3-15

Seat belts 3-14

Rear center belt 3-18

Height adjustment 3-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-20

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system 3-16

Seat belt warning 3-15

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-17

Seatback pocket 3-8

Seating capacity 5-44

Seats 3-2

Armrest(front) 3-6

Folding the rear seat 3-11

Front seat adjustment 3-5

Headrest(front) 3-6

Headrest(rear) 3-9

Rear seat 3-9

Seatback pocket 3-8

Side impact air bag 3-50

Side view mirror 4-33

Sliding armrest 4-87

Smooth cornering 5-36

Snow tires 5-39

P S

R

Index

8I

Spare tire

Compact spare tire 6-23

Compact spare tire replacement 7-42

Removing and storing the spare tire 6-18

Special driving conditions 5-35

Driving at night 5-36

Driving in flooded areas 5-37

Driving in the rain 5-37

Hazardous driving conditions 5-35

Highway driving 5-38

Rocking the vehicle 5-35

Smooth cornering 5-36

Speedometer 4-35

SRS components and functions 3-37

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start 6-3

Steering wheel 4-30

Electric power steering 4-30

Horn 4-32

Tilt and telescopic steering 4-31

Steering wheel audio control 4-98

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5-44

Storage compartment 4-87

Center console storage 4-87

Glove box 4-88

Luggage net 4-89

Sliding armrest 4-87

Sunglass holder 4-88

Sunglass holder 4-88

Sunroof 4-26

Sunvisor 4-90

Tachometer 4-37

Tailgate 4-14

Tether anchor system 3-30

Tilt and telescopic steering 4-31

Tire and loading information label 5-43

Tire chains 5-40

Tire mobility kit 6-25

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) 6-7, 6-12

Tire specification and pressure label 8-7

Tires and wheels 7-37

Checking tire inflation pressure 7-38

Compact spare tire replacement 7-42

Low aspect ratio tire 7-46

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures 7-37

Tire care 7-37

Tire maintenance 7-42

Tire replacement 7-41

Tire rotation 7-39

Tire sidewall labeling 7-43

Tire traction 7-42

Wheel alignment and tire balance 7-40

Wheel replacement 7-42

T

I 9

Index

Tires and wheels 8-3

Towing 6-32

Towing capacity 5-44

Transaxle

Automatic transaxle 5-10

Manual transaxle 5-7

Trip computer 4-39

Trunk 4-12

Vehicle break-in process 1-5

Vehicle capacity weight 5-43

Vehicle certification label 8-6

Vehicle curb weight 5-48

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders 1-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN) 8-6

Vehicle load limit 5-43

Cargo capacity 5-44

Certification label 5-46

Seating capacity 5-44

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5-44

Tire and loading information label 5-43

Towing capacity 5-44

Vehicle capacity weight 5-43

Vehicle stability management 5-26

Vehicle weight 5-48

Base curb weight 5-48

Cargo weight 5-48

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-48

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-48

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-48

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-48

Vehicle curb weight 5-48

Volume/weight 8-3

Warning and indicators 4-44

Washer fluid 7-26

Weight/volume 8-3

Wheel alignment and tire balance 7-39

Wheel replacement 7-42

Windows 4-16

Auto down window 4-18

Auto up/down window 4-18

Power window lock button 4-19

Windshield defrosting and defogging 4-83

Automatic ventilation 4-86

Defogging logic 4-85

Winter driving 5-39

Snow tires 5-39

Tire chains 5-40

Wiper blades 7-31

W

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Accent Hyundai works, you can view and download the Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Hyundai Accent as well as other Hyundai manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Hyundai Accent. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Hyundai Accent 1.6l SE 2016 Sedan Owner's Manual V2 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.